JP2015110179A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To relax the restriction on the layout of a game board having a plurality of display devices.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises: a first display device having a display capable of image display according to the progress of a game; and a second display device having a display capable of image display relating to the display content of the first display device. A game board has a display window portion allowing for viewing the back to face a game area, and is so constituted that at least a portion of the game area allows for seeing through backward. The first display device is so arranged that the display faces the back of the display window portion and the second display device is so arranged that the display faces the back of the game area. The game board comprises: moving means for moving the second display device to the front of the first display device; and swinging means for swinging the second display device, the swinging means performing a swinging performance by swinging the second display device.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine having a plurality of display devices.

  In a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine, a variable display game with a plurality of pieces of identification information is executed on a display device based on winning of a game ball in a start winning opening provided in a game area, and the variable display game is a special result. In this case, a special game state that is advantageous to the player is generally generated.

  In such a gaming machine, the display device is composed of a main display device and a sub display device disposed on one side of the main display device, and the sub display device overlaps the front of the main display device. A device has been proposed in which the player can visually recognize the front and back of the sub-display device by rotating it around the support shaft (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2011-087706 A

  By the way, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned Patent Document 1, since the two display devices are disposed so as to fit inside the window portion formed in the game board, the window portion is made larger than necessary. Therefore, there is a problem that the space for the game ball to flow down and the space for arranging other game members are compressed.

  In addition, when two display devices are accommodated inside a limited-size window portion so that the two display devices are not overlapped as much as possible, there is a great restriction on the size and arrangement of at least one of the two display devices. There was a problem that.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and it is possible to relax the restrictions on the game board layout generated by providing two display devices, and to improve the fun of the game. An object is to provide a gaming machine equipped with a board.

  In a typical embodiment of the present invention, in a gaming machine having a gaming board in which a gaming area on which a game ball can flow down is formed on the surface, the first having a display unit capable of displaying an image according to the progress of the game. A display device, and a second display device having a display unit capable of displaying an image related to the display content of the first display device, wherein the game board can visually recognize the rear so as to face the game area. A display window portion is provided, and at least a part of the game area is configured to be seen through the back, and the first display device is disposed such that the display portion faces the back of the display window portion, The second display device is arranged such that a display unit faces the rear of the game area, and moving means for moving the second display device to the front of the first display device, and swinging the second display device. Swinging means, and the swinging means And performing a more rocking effects by swinging of the second display device.

  According to one embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to relax restrictions on a game board layout provided with a plurality of display devices.

1 is a perspective view of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a perspective view of a gaming machine when a glass frame is opened according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the game board of the state which attached the center case of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of the game board, center case, and rendering device unit of the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view of a game board in the state where the center case of the 1st embodiment of the present invention was removed. It is a disassembled perspective view of the center case of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the distribution apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is a disassembled perspective view of the distribution apparatus arrange | positioned in a center case, (B) was installed in the center case It is a front view of a distribution apparatus. It is a disassembled perspective view of the production | presentation apparatus unit of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of the unit base member of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the lower production | presentation apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the lower production | presentation apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is a back view of the movable part of a lower production | presentation apparatus, (B) is a perspective view of a lower production | presentation apparatus. It is a disassembled perspective view of the back side production | presentation apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the left shutter unit of the back side production | presentation apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the rotation operation | movement of the rotation door of the left shutter unit of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the sliding operation | movement of the left shutter unit of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the lower decoration unit of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of the intermediate member which comprises the lower decoration unit of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of the decoration member attached to the intermediate member of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the lower decoration unit of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is the front view which expanded a part of lower decoration unit, (B) is the BB surface of (A). It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the lower decoration unit along. It is a perspective view of the flow path component which comprises the lower decoration unit of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the upper decoration unit of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the top production | presentation apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of the light-guide plate which comprises the movable display unit of the upper stage production apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a cross-sectional view of the top effect device of the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view of a movable display unit and a drive mechanism of the upper stage production device of the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a back view of the top production device in the state where the fixed base of the 1st embodiment of the present invention was removed. It is a disassembled perspective view of the right part production | presentation apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional perspective view of the right part production | presentation apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of the movable decoration unit and drive mechanism of the right part production | presentation apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a reverse view of the right part production | presentation apparatus in the state which removed the fixed base of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of the upper decoration member of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a left upper expansion perspective view of the upper decoration member in the state where the game board of the 1st embodiment of the present invention was attached. FIG. 31 is an enlarged view of the periphery of the universal start gate in FIG. 30 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 31 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of a special prize opening solenoid in FIG. 30 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 31 is a rear perspective view of the peripheral portion of the universal start gate in FIG. 30 of the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view which shows the attachment state of the static elimination unit in the state by which the glass frame of the 1st Embodiment of this invention was open | released. It is a perspective exploded view of the static elimination unit of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a back surface perspective view of the static elimination unit of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows the static elimination unit in FIG. 34 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows the operation | movement aspect of the static elimination unit when accommodated in the frame of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows the operation | movement aspect of the static elimination unit when accommodated in the frame of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the static elimination unit of the modification of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the specification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment of the present invention, (A) is the specification of the variable display game, (B) is a big hit state (special game) when winning the special figure variable display game (C) is the round distribution table 1 including the selection probability of the number of rounds in the big hit state when the game ball passes through the lottery gate, (D) is the case when the game ball passes through the fixed gate The round distribution table 2 including the number of rounds in the big hit state is shown. It is a figure explaining the state transition in the game machine of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a block block diagram which shows the control system centering on the game control apparatus of the game machine of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a block block diagram which shows the control system centering on the production | presentation control apparatus of the game machine of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart of the first half part of the main process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart of the latter half part of the main process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the timer interruption process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the distribution status update process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure game process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the passage gate switch monitoring process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure start port switch common process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure pending | holding information determination process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure normal process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure change start process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is the special figure 1 change start process performed at the time of the start of a 1st special figure change display game, (B) Is a special figure 2 fluctuation start process executed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure information setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fluctuation pattern setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the change start information setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure fluctuation process transition setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is a 1st special figure fluctuation display game, (B) is a 2nd special figure fluctuation display. This is the case for games. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure change process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure display process transfer setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure display process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit round determination process transfer setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit round determination process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process transition setting process 1 of the fanfare / interval of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the presentation mode information check process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the time reduction fluctuation frequency update process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the time-short end setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot end process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit end setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) shows the big hit end setting process 1, (B) shows the big hit end setting process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot end setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the symbol fluctuation | variation control process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the magnet fraud monitoring process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the radio wave fraud monitoring process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st main process performed by the microcomputer for main control (1stCPU) of the production | presentation control apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the interruption process in the presentation control apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd main process performed by the image | video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) of the presentation control apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st scene control process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the main display apparatus (variable display apparatus) and the sub display apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is a customer waiting state, (B) is other than a customer waiting state. Show. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is a figure which shows the structure of the sub display apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is a display screen of a sub display apparatus, (B) is a general game auxiliary display area, (C) is a special figure change. The state display symbol (4th symbol) in the display game is shown. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the customer waiting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during a fluctuation | variation of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is the figure which looked at the back side production | presentation apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention from the upper right upper part, (A) has shown the state before slide operation | movement of a shutter unit, (B) has shown the state after slide operation | movement. It is the figure which looked at the back side production | presentation apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention from the front, (A) is the state before a rotation door rotates, (B) is after a rotation door rotates. Indicates the state. It is a figure explaining the lower production | presentation apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is the state before operation | movement of a lower decoration member, (B) has shown the state after operation | movement of a lower decoration member. It is a figure which shows the main display apparatus and sub display apparatus from the start of a variable display game to the temporary stop in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the development effect performed with an upper stage production device (sub display device) after the temporary stop of a variable display game in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the right part presentation operation | movement control process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example which displays description of operation | movement of the right part direction production apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of the right part direction production apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of the right part direction production apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the result of the production | presentation by the right part production | presentation apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit round determination process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the round determination method description process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the firing mode setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the discharge timing alerting | reporting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the gate passage sound corresponding to the round number determination command of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the status notification image corresponding to the distribution status command of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows from presentation of the big hit of the 1st Embodiment of this invention to presentation of the description of the big hit round determination method. The description of the game for determining the big hit round of the 1st Embodiment of this invention has shown the state currently displayed on the main display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display of the candidate which the firing alerting | reporting aspect for determining the jackpot round of the 1st Embodiment of this invention selects. It is a figure which shows selection of the candidate which the firing alerting | reporting aspect for determining the jackpot round of the 1st Embodiment of this invention selects. It is a figure which shows an example of the alerting | reporting timing of the alerting | reporting timing of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is waiting, (B) has shown launching. It is a figure which shows an example of selection of the designated jackpot determination method of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is at the time of selection, (B) has shown after confirmation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the right strike warning command reception process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is a figure explaining an example of the right-handed warning of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is a game ball | bowl with the 1st passing gate part or the 2nd passing gate part by performing a right-hand hit during normal game (B) shows a state where a right-handed warning is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the game machine error monitoring process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the human sensitive sensor error process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the arrangement | positioning and detection range of the magnetic sensor and human sensor of a 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the aspect of the error alerting | reporting of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the collective display apparatus (special figure / common figure LED substrate) of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the external appearance of the game control apparatus which controls the package display apparatus of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the display aspect of the special figure display of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention, (A) is a figure explaining the structure and fluctuation | variation aspect of a special figure display, (B) is fluctuation | variation. It is a figure which shows the list of the result display mode of a display game. It is a figure explaining the output mode other than the special figure display in the collective display apparatus of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining 7-segment LED which comprises the special figure display of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention, (A) shows each segment and a terminal, (B) has shown the circuit diagram. It is a figure explaining the connector for collective display of the game control apparatus connected to the collective display apparatus of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention, (A) is pin arrangement of a connector, (B) is a pin and output data. The correspondence is shown. It is a figure which shows the connection of each pin of the collective display connector of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention, and each terminal which comprises a collective display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the modification 1 of the display mode which shows being fluctuate | varied by 7 segment LED of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification 2 of the display mode which shows being changed by 7 segment LED of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display mode which shows a loss with 7 segment LED of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention, (A)-(C) has shown the loss display mode of the special figure 1 display. It is a figure explaining an example which switches presentation mode according to the losing display mode of a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the modification 1 of the collective display apparatus of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification 2 of the collective display apparatus of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart of the latter half part of the main process in the game control apparatus of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the segment LED edit process of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining an example of the confirmation display of the collective display apparatus of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the modification of the confirmation display of 7 segment LED contained in the collective display apparatus of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the modification of the confirmation display of the single LED contained in the collective display apparatus of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the passage gate switch monitoring process of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit end process of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the presentation mode of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production mode number selection table of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention, (A) is a time-shortage production mode number selection table, (B) is an effect change time production mode number selection table. It is a figure explaining the change pattern selection table according to the game state and the number of reservations in the game control device of the 2nd embodiment of the present invention, and (A) shows the time of losing and (B) shows the time of big hit. It is a figure explaining the production according to the production mode in the production control device of the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the message for selecting the production | presentation mode displayed during the last round of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the state at the time of completion | finish of the last round of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the state after the description is displayed in order to select the production mode of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention until the suggestion of the gate of a 1st sub display apparatus is displayed. It is a figure which shows the state by which the suggestion of the gate of the 1st sub display apparatus of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention is displayed. It is a figure which shows the state by which the game mode of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention was allowed to pass a passage gate and the production | presentation mode was selected. It is a figure which shows the state by which the time reduction effect mode was selected in the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the state in which the production | presentation selected in the 2nd Embodiment of this invention was performed. It is a figure which shows the message for selecting the production | presentation mode displayed during the interval of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the state at the time of presentation mode selection in the interval of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the state after the description is displayed in order to select presentation mode during the interval of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention until the suggestion of the gate of a 1st sub display apparatus is displayed. The figure which shows the state by which the presentation mode was selected in order to select a production | presentation mode during the ending by letting a game ball pass the pass gate during the interval of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention, and to select a production | presentation mode. is there. It is a figure which shows the state by which the message to the effect of determining the detailed production mode was displayed during the ending of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the state by which the description for selecting a detailed production mode was displayed during the ending of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the state by which the detailed presentation mode was selected during the ending of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing the state where the production corresponding to the production mode selected in the 2nd embodiment of the present invention is performed. It is a front view of the game board of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the right part direction device of a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the right part direction operation control process of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation by the right part production | presentation apparatus of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the hand-holding effect of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the notice effect by the 2nd sub display apparatus of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification by which the 2nd sub display apparatus of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention was arrange | positioned across the opening part (display window part) and the game board in the initial position. It is a block block diagram which shows the control system centering on the presentation control apparatus of the game machine of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st main process performed by the microcomputer for main control (1stCPU) of the presentation control apparatus of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the time information storage process of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the regular effect aspect determination table for determining the aspect of the regular effect of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the content of the execution information storage area of the regular effect of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the regular effect notification information of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention, (A) is regular effect invalid alert information, (B) is regular effect valid alert information. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st scene control process of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the regular effect execution process of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation aspect until the regular production of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention is performed, (A) is at the time of a normal production, (B) is after the movement restrictions of an upper production | presentation apparatus, C) shows a case where the notice effect is executed after the movement restriction. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation aspect until the regular production of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention is performed, (A) after completion | finish of a variable display game, (B) is during execution of a variable display game, C) shows the state before execution of the regular effects. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect at the time of the regular production execution of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention, (A) is just before execution of a regular production, (B) is a regular production execution start, (C) is a regular production execution. The inside state is shown. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect at the time of completion | finish of the regular production of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention, (A) is performing regular production, (B) is just before completion of a regular production, (C) is after completion of a regular production. Shows the state. It is a figure explaining the modification which performs a regular production | presentation in the main display apparatus in the 2nd Embodiment of this invention, (A) is just before a regular production start, (B) is a regular production start time, (C) is. It shows that regular production is being executed. It is a figure which shows the modification by which the 2nd sub display apparatus of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention was arrange | positioned across the opening part (display window part) and the game board in the initial position.

  A gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. Note that the front, rear, left, and right in the description of the embodiment refer to a direction viewed from the game board (a direction viewed from the player).

(First embodiment)
[Game machine configuration]
First, with reference to FIG.1 and FIG.2, the whole structure of the game machine 1 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention is demonstrated. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 1 with the front frame 5 and the glass frame 6 closed. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 1 with only the glass frame 6 opened.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the gaming machine 1 includes an opening / closing frame 4 whose right side portion is attached to a main body frame 2 fixed to an island facility via a hinge 3 so as to be freely opened and closed. The open / close frame 4 includes a front frame 5 and a glass frame 6.

  The front frame 5 is a frame having a storage part (game board storage part) 5a capable of storing the game board 30 (see FIG. 3). A game board 30 is disposed on the front frame 5, and a glass frame 6 having a cover glass 6 a that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The front frame 5 and the glass frame 6 can be opened individually. For example, only the glass frame 6 can be opened to access the game area 31 (see FIG. 3) of the game board 30. Further, by opening the front frame 5 in a state where the glass frame 6 is not opened, the game control device 600 and the effect control device 700 (see FIG. 4) arranged on the back side of the game board 30, the front frame 5 It is possible to access the power supply device 800, the payout control device 640, and the like arranged at the bottom of the back surface.

  A storage unit 641 for storing game balls replenished from a replenishing device (not shown) installed in the island facility is provided at the upper back of the front frame 5, and flows down from the storage unit 641 behind the left side of the front frame 5. A payout unit 642 for paying out the played game balls to the upper plate 11a is provided. The payout control device 640 is a device that controls the operation of the payout unit 642.

  A decorative member 7 is disposed around the cover glass 6 a of the glass frame 6. The decoration member 7 accommodates a frame decoration device 21 (see FIG. 44) constituted by LEDs or the like, and the light emission state of the decoration member 7 can be adjusted by controlling the frame decoration device 21.

  An illumination unit 8 is disposed above the glass frame 6, and a movable illumination 9 is disposed on the left and right sides of the illumination unit 8. The illumination unit 8 accommodates an illumination member such as an LED inside, and performs a light emission effect according to the gaming state. The movable illumination 9 includes an illumination member such as an LED and a frame effect device 22 (see FIG. 44) configured by an illumination drive motor that drives the illumination member. The frame effect device 22 of the movable illumination 9 is controlled to rotationally drive the illumination member according to the gaming state. In addition, the illumination member arrange | positioned inside the illumination unit 8 and the movable illumination 9 also comprises some frame decoration apparatuses 21 (refer FIG. 44).

  Further, a reinforcing sheet metal 6b is disposed on the rear surface of the glass frame 6, and the reinforcing sheet metal 6b has a conducting portion 6c that protrudes rearward so as to be in contact with a charge eliminating unit 900 (see FIG. 3) of a game board 30 described later. . The conducting portion 6c functions as a ground member, and the conducting portion 6c comes into contact with the conducting member 901 (see FIG. 34) of the static elimination unit 900 to remove static electricity charged in the game board 30.

  The gaming machine 1 includes an upper speaker 10a and a lower speaker 10b that emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like. The upper speaker 10 a is disposed on both upper side portions of the glass frame 6, and the lower speaker 10 b is disposed on the lower left corner of the front frame 5.

  A gaming state notification LED 12 for notifying abnormality in the gaming machine 1 is provided on the upper right side of the left movable illumination 9. When an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine 1, the gaming state notification LED 12 is turned on or blinks, and a notification sound for notifying the abnormality is output from the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b.

  Abnormalities occurring in the gaming machine 1 include failure of the gaming machine 1 and implementation of fraud. The illegal act includes, for example, an act of illegally manipulating the trajectory of the launched game ball with a magnet, an act of oscillating radio waves with respect to a start switch of the gaming machine 1 and the like. These fraudulent acts are detected by detecting magnetism with the magnetic sensor 23 (see FIG. 43) or detecting radio waves with the radio wave sensor 24 (see FIG. 43).

  Further, the act of opening the open / close frame 4 illegally is also included in the illegal act. The open / close state of the front frame 5 is detected by the front frame open detection switch 25 (see FIG. 43), and the open / closed state of the glass frame 6 is detected by the glass frame open detection switch 26 (see FIG. 43).

  An upper plate unit 11 including an upper plate 11 a is provided at the lower front portion of the glass frame 6. The game balls stored in the upper plate 11 a are supplied to a ball launch unit 13 provided at the lower part of the front frame 5.

  A lower pan 14 is installed in the front frame 5 below the ball launch unit 13, and an operation handle 15 for controlling the operation of the ball launch unit 13 is installed in the lower right corner of the front frame 5. . When the player turns the operation handle 15, the ball launch unit 13 launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 11 a to the game area 31 of the game board 30. The lower plate 14 is provided with a ball removal mechanism 16 for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 14 to the outside.

  The upper plate unit 11 is provided with an effect button 17 for receiving an operation input from a player on the front side of the upper plate 11a. A selection button 29 is arranged on the outer periphery of the effect button 17. When the player operates the effect button 17, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game on the variable display device 35 (see FIG. 4), and the normal game state (normal state) The effect pattern (effect mode) can be changed. The fluctuation display game includes a special figure fluctuation display game and a common figure fluctuation display game. In the present specification, when the fluctuation display game is simply referred to, the special figure fluctuation display game is indicated.

  The normal gaming state is a gaming state in which a specific gaming state has not occurred. The specific game state is, for example, a probability variation state (probability variation state) with a high probability of a lottery display game lottery probability, a lottery probability of a variation display game is a normal probability, but improves the number of executions per unit time of the variation display game The time-short state (time shortening variation state), the big hit gaming state (special gaming state), the small hit gaming state, and the like.

  Here, the probability variation state is one that continues until the next big hit (loop type), one that continues until a predetermined number of fluctuation display games are executed (number-of-times type), and a predetermined probability falling lottery. Continuing until it is done (falling lottery type) is considered.

  In the loop type, whether or not the probability variation state is generated is determined by the big hit symbol random number and the probability variation state is generated, and in the case of the number cut type or the falling lottery type, the probability variation state is always generated when the big hit occurs. However, a winning device or the like having a specific area may be provided, and a probability variation state may be generated when a game ball passes through the specific area.

  Below the decorative member 7 of the glass frame 6, a ball lending button 18 that is operated when a player rents a game ball, and a discharge button 19 that is operated to discharge a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown). Are arranged. Further, a balance display unit 20 for displaying a balance of a prepaid card or the like is provided between the ball lending button 18 and the discharge button 19.

[Game board configuration]
A gaming board 30 provided in the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30 with the center case (front component) 34 attached thereto. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the game board 30, the center case 34, and the rendering device unit (back surface component) 200. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the game board 30 with the center case 34 removed. The front constituent member and the rear constituent member may be collectively referred to as a center case.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the game board 30 is provided with a guide rail 32 a made of metal and a partition member 32 b made of conductive resin on the surface of a rectangular game board 32 made of plastic or the like. A circular game area 31 is defined. The game board 32 is a transparent member that can be seen through the back. A game board main body is configured by the game board 32, the guide rail 32 a that partitions the game area 31, and the partition member 32 b.

  In the upper right corner of the game board 30, there is provided a static elimination unit 900 that releases and removes static electricity charged on the game board 32 to the glass frame 6. The details of the static elimination unit 900 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the upper right corner and the lower right corner of the game board 30, a fixed receiving portion 32c fixed by a clamp-like fixing member (not shown) provided on the front frame 5 is formed, and the upper left corner of the game board 30 and An engagement receiving portion 32d that can engage with an engagement hook 5b (see FIG. 2) provided on the front frame 5 is formed at the lower left corner. The game board 30 is stored in the storage part 5a of the front frame 5 by engaging the fixing member and the engagement hook 5b of the front frame 5 with the fixed receiving part 32c and the engagement receiving part 32d of the game board 30. It is fixed to the front surface of the front frame 5.

  In the game area 31, a center case (front component) 34 having an opening (display window) 34a is disposed. An opening 32e having a shape along the outer periphery of the center case 34 is formed in the game board 32, and the center case 34 is fitted into the opening 32e from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 4, on the back side of the game board 30 is provided an effect device unit (back surface component) 200 composed of various effect devices, and on the back side of the effect device unit 200, a display unit 70 and main control are provided. A unit 80 is provided. The display unit 70 includes a variable display device 35 as a main display device, and an effect control device 700 that controls effects and the like displayed on the variable display device 35. The main control unit 80 includes a game control device 600 and a base member 81 for rotatably mounting the game control device 600 with respect to the rendering device unit 200.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the variable display device 35 of the display unit 70 includes a display unit 35 a that can display a variable display game that displays a plurality of pieces of identification information. The opening 34a of the center case 34 is provided corresponding to the display unit 35a of the variable display device 35, and the display unit 35a of the variable display device 35 is visually recognized through the opening (display window) 34a of the center case 34. It is possible.

  The display unit 35a of the variable display device 35 is a liquid crystal display capable of displaying an arbitrary image, and is based on the progress of the game, such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols) and a character that produces a variable display game on the display screen. An image is displayed. The variable display device 35 is configured such that a plurality of variable display areas (for example, three variable display areas on the left side, the center, and the right side) are set on the display unit 35a, and independent images can be displayed in each of the display areas. ing. Note that the variable display device 35 is not limited to a device including a liquid crystal display, and may include a display such as an EL or a CRT.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the game area 31 on the left side of the center case 34 is provided with a universal figure start gate 36 that establishes a start condition for a normal symbol (normal figure) variable display game when a game ball passes. Is done. When the game ball that has been driven into the game area 31 passes through the usual figure start gate 36, the usual figure variation display game is executed.

  Three general winning holes 40 are arranged in the game area 31 on the lower left side of the center case 34, and one general winning opening 40 is arranged in the game area 31 on the lower right side of the center case 34.

  The game area 31 below the center case 34 is provided with a first start prize opening (first start prize area) 37 for giving a start condition of the special figure variation display game, and a second start prize opening ( A second start winning area 38) is provided. The second start winning opening 38 is provided with a pair of movable members 38a whose upper side is opened in an inverted “C” shape and converted into a state in which game balls can easily flow. When the game ball wins the first start winning opening 37 or the second starting winning opening 38, a special symbol (special drawing) variable display game is executed.

  The pair of movable members 38a of the second start winning prize port 38 normally maintains a closed state (a winning regulation state that is disadvantageous for the player) with an interval of about the diameter of the game ball. However, since the first start prize opening 37 is provided above the second start prize opening 38, the game ball may not win the second start prize opening 38 when the movable member 38a is closed. It has become.

  The movable member 38a opens in the shape of a reverse “c” via the general electric solenoid 27 (see FIG. 43) when the result of the normal figure change display game is in a predetermined stop display mode. The state is changed (converted) to an open state (easy winning state advantageous to the player) that easily flows into the second start winning opening 38.

  The movable member 38a is controlled by a game control device 600 described later. The game control device 600 increases the frequency of occurrence of the easy-to-win state or increases the occurrence time of the easy-to-win state compared to the normal gaming state in the probability variation state or the short time state. It is said to be in the state of ordinary power support.

  In the game area 31 between the first start winning opening 37 and the right general winning opening 40, the first winning prize is obtained by rotating the upper end side in a direction to be tilted forward by the big winning opening solenoid 28a (see FIG. 43). A first special variable winning device 41 having an attacker-type opening / closing door 41a that opens its mouth is provided. The first special variable winning device 41 converts the state of the first big prize opening from a closed state (blocking state unfavorable to the player) to an open state (special game state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure display game. In addition, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player by facilitating the inflow of the game ball into the first big prize opening. Note that lower count switches 605a to 605m (see FIG. 43) are arranged in the first grand prize opening as detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special prize opening.

  In addition, a second special variable prize winning device 42 having a turning portion 42a for opening the second big prize opening by being turned by a big prize opening solenoid 28b (see FIG. 43) is provided at the upper left portion of the center case 34. It has been. Similarly to the first special variable prize-winning device 41, the second special variable prize-winning device 42 is in an opened state (from a closed state unfavorable to the player) from a state in which the second big prize opening is closed based on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game. (Special gaming state advantageous to the player), and by allowing the game ball to easily flow into the second big prize opening, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. . Note that an upper count switch 606 (see FIG. 43) is disposed in the second grand prize opening as detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special prize opening.

  A game ball is placed in the general winning port 40, the first starting winning port 37, the second starting winning port 38, the first big winning port of the first special variable winning device 41, and the second big winning port of the second special variable winning device 42. When a prize is won, the payout control device 640 discharges the number of prize balls according to the type of the winning prize opening from the payout unit 642 to the upper plate 11a. In general, the number of winning balls (for example, 15) when winning the grand prize opening is the largest, followed by the general winning opening 40 (for example, 10) and the start winning opening (for example, 3), but the first big The number of winning balls at the winning opening and the second major winning opening or the number of winning balls at the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be different.

  The game area 31 below the second start winning opening 38 is provided with an out opening 43 for collecting game balls that have not won the winning opening or the like.

  In addition, on the outside of the game area 31 and in the lower right part of the game board 32, a collective display for executing a special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game, special figure 2 fluctuation display game) and a general figure fluctuation display game. A device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 59 that display information such as the current gaming state.

  The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 1 display unit) 51 and a second special figure fluctuation display unit (figure display unit) (figure display game) composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like. Special figure 2 display) 52, a general figure display section (normal figure display) 53 for a common figure variation display game, and a memory display section for notification of the start (hold) memory number of each variable display game (special figure 1) A holding display unit 54, a special figure 2 holding display unit 55, and a general drawing holding display unit 56).

  In addition, the collective display device 50 has a high-probability display unit and a short-time state for notifying that the probability state of the big hit is a high probability state from the time when the gaming machine 1 is turned on until the first big hit occurrence. Then, a gaming state display unit 57 including a short-time state display unit that lights up and notifies the occurrence of a short-term state, and the number of rounds at the time of big hit (number of opening and closing rounds of the first special variable winning device 41 and the second special variable winning device 42) Is displayed.

  Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 1, the details of the general map variation display game and the special diagram variation display game will be described.

  In the gaming machine 1, a game is played by launching a game ball from the ball launch unit 13 toward the game area 31. The launched game balls flow down the game area 31 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, etc. arranged in various places in the game area 31, and the normal start gate 36, the general winning opening 40, the first start The winning opening 37, the second start winning opening 38, the first special variation winning apparatus 41 or the second special variable winning apparatus 42 is won, or the game area 31 flows into the out opening 43 provided at the bottom of the gaming area 31. Discharged from. Then, when a game ball wins the general winning port 40, the first starting winning port 37, the second starting winning port 38, the first special variable winning device 41 or the second special variable winning device 42, the type of the winning port that is won is determined. A corresponding number of prize balls are discharged to the upper plate 11a via the payout unit 642.

  The general-purpose start gate 36 includes a gate switch 603 (see FIGS. 31 and 43) that detects a game ball that has passed through the general-purpose start gate 36, and a game board via the flange portion 36b while supporting the gate switch 603. A gate member (support member) 36a (see FIG. 31) attached to the main body (game board 32) is provided. When the game ball passes through the usual figure start gate 36, it is detected by the gate switch 603, and the usual figure variation display game is executed.

  A state in which the normal map variable display game cannot be started, for example, when the normal map variable display game has already been played and the normal map variable display game has not been completed, When the 2 start winning opening 38 is converted to the open state, when the game ball passes the normal start gate 36, the stored number is added (+1) if the normal start memory number is less than the upper limit number.

  In the normal map start memory, a random number value for hit determination for determining the hit error of the normal map fluctuation display game is stored, and when this hit determination random number value coincides with the determination value, the normal map change display is performed. A specific result mode (specific result) is derived by winning the game.

  The universal map display game is executed by a universal map display 53 provided in the collective display device 50. The general-purpose indicator 53 is composed of LEDs indicating normal identification information (general-purpose) in the lit state and indicating a shift in the unlit state, and the normal identification information varies by blinking this LED. Display is performed, and after a predetermined fluctuation display time has elapsed, the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED.

  When the common figure random number extracted when passing through the common figure start gate 36 is a winning value, the normal symbol displayed on the universal figure display unit 53 stops in a hit state and enters a hit state. At this time, when the electric solenoid 27 (see FIG. 43) is driven, the movable member 38a is converted to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game ball to the second start winning opening 38 is obtained. Is acceptable.

  The winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 37 and the winning to the second start winning opening 38 are detected by the first start opening switch 601 (see FIG. 43) and the second start opening switch 602 (see FIG. 43). The A game ball won in the first start winning opening 37 is detected as a start winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game, and a predetermined upper limit number is stored, and a game ball won in the second start winning opening 38 is It is detected as a start winning ball of the special figure 2 variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit.

  When detecting the starting winning ball of the special figure variation display game, the big hit random number value, the big hit symbol random number value, and each fluctuation pattern random number value are extracted. These random numbers are stored in the special figure holding storage area (a part of the RAM) of the game control device 600 as a special figure start winning memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of eight times). The number stored in the special figure start winning memory is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display unit 54 and the special figure 2 hold display unit 55 for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50, and the display unit 35a of the variable display unit 35. Or displayed on a display 480 as a sub display device (second display device) described later.

  The game control device 600 executes the special figure 1 variable display game with the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning to the first start winning opening 37 or the first start memory. In addition, the game control device 600 executes the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display 52 based on the winning to the second starting prize opening 38 or the second start memory.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are played by stopping and displaying a predetermined result form after the identification information is variably displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. In addition, in the variation display device 35, a decoration special diagram variation display game for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) corresponding to each special diagram variation display game is executed.

  In the decorative special symbol variable display game in the variable display device 35, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers and the like described above is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), and middle (third special symbol). The display is performed by starting the variable display (scroll display) in the order of symbols), sequentially stopping the symbols that have changed after a predetermined time, and displaying the result of the special symbol variable display game. In addition, the variable display device 35 displays various effects such as the appearance of characters in order to improve interest.

  When a game ball is won at the first start winning opening 37 or the second starting winning opening 38 at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number at the time of winning detection is a big hit value), the special figure variation display game As a result of this, a specific result mode (special result mode) is derived from the display symbols, and a big hit state (special game state) is obtained. Corresponding to this, the display mode of the variable display device 35 is a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as “7, 7, 7” are arranged).

  After that, a special gaming state occurs, and energization to the big prize opening solenoid 28a and the big prize opening solenoid 28b (see FIG. 43) provided in the first special variation prize winning device 41 and the second special variable prize winning device 42 causes a large amount. The winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). That is, the big winning opening provided in the first special variable winning device 41 and the second special variable winning device 42 is opened widely for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls wins, during which the player opens many game balls. The privilege that it can be acquired is given.

  In this embodiment, there is a case where a round number determination game (auxiliary game) described later is executed and a case where it is not executed during the period from when the special result mode is derived until the special game state occurs. You may unify to one side. In addition, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be configured as separate displays or the same display, but each special figure variation display game is not executed simultaneously. Is set as follows.

  As for the decorative special figure fluctuation display game in the fluctuation display device 35, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game may be executed in different display devices or in different display areas. You may make it perform with a display apparatus or a display area. In this case, the decorative special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is prevented from being executed simultaneously. The special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game, and there is a start memory of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. When the figure change display game is ready to be executed, the special figure 2 change display game is executed. The special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game may be executed in the order in which the start memory is stored.

  Note that the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured such that the player performs left-handed or right-handed according to the gaming state. A left-handed or right-handed instruction is displayed on the display unit 35a of the variable display device 35 so that the player can easily make a game according to the game state.

[Center case]
Next, the center case 34 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3, 6, and 7. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the center case 34. FIG. 7A is an exploded perspective view of the sorting device 90 disposed in the center case 34, and FIG. 7B is a front view of the sorting device 90 installed in the center case 34.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the center case (front component) 34 is configured as a transparent ring-shaped (frame-shaped) frame. The center case 34 has a fitting part 34b fitted in an opening 32e (see FIG. 4) formed in the game board 32 of the game board 30, and a hook part 34c formed in a bowl shape with respect to the fitting part 34b. And a guide portion 34d capable of rolling the game ball. The center case 34 is disposed in the game area 31 in front of the collar portion 34c.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 and 6, a second special variable winning device 42 is provided at the upper left portion of the center case 34. The second special variable prize winning device 42 is configured to receive a prize in the second big prize opening of the turning part 42a for opening and closing the second big prize opening, the big prize opening solenoid 28b for turning the turning part 42a, and the game ball. And an upper count switch 606 as a count sensor to detect. The game ball that has won the second special variation winning device 42 is guided to the back side of the game board through the winning ball channel 44.

  The special winning opening solenoid 28 b is fixed to the back surface of the center case 34. A decorative plate 34e is provided on the front surface of the center case 34 at the position where the special winning opening solenoid 28b is attached. The decorative plate 34e is a member that hides the special winning opening solenoid 28b. The center case 34 is almost entirely formed as a transparent member. However, by providing the decorative plate 34e, the large winning opening solenoid 28b can be prevented from being visually recognized from the front, and the appearance is not impaired. In addition, you may restrict | limit that the big prize opening solenoid 28b is visually recognized from the front by sticking a decoration sticker on the front surface by making the decoration board 34e transparent.

  Under the center case 34, a stage unit 100 having a rolling surface 101 on which a game ball can roll, a warp passage 110 for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area 31 to the stage unit 100, and an effect device unit (back surface) And a cover member 120 for restricting the inflow of game balls into the component 200). The stage unit 100, the warp passage 110, and the cover member 120 are configured as transparent members.

  The warp passage 110 is disposed in the lower left part of the center case 34. The warp passage 110 receives a game ball 111 that has flowed down the game area 31 on the left side of the center case 34, and the game ball that has passed through the reception unit 111 at the left end of the rolling surface 101 of the stage unit 100. And a guiding unit 112 for guiding. The receiving portion 111 is opened obliquely upward to the left so that it can easily receive the game ball flowing down the left side of the center case 34. The guide portion 112 has a path shape with an open rear surface, but the opening of the rear surface is blocked by the cover member 120.

  The stage unit 100 is disposed at the lower center of the center case 34. The stage unit 100 includes a rolling surface 101 that extends in the left-right direction and allows a game ball to roll. A cover member 120 is provided behind the stage unit 100.

  The rolling surface 101 of the stage unit 100 is formed in a wavy shape in which both the left and right ends and the center are raised. A first guide portion 102 that slopes downward toward the rear is provided at the center of the rolling surface 101, and a second slope that slopes downward toward the front on the rolling surface 101 on both the left and right sides of the first guide portion 102. A guide unit 103 is provided.

  The cover member 120 includes an upright wall portion 121 that rises upward from the rear end portion of the rolling surface 101 and a folded wall portion 122 that is folded back from the upper end of the upright wall portion 121 so as to face the rolling surface 101. It consists of. The standing wall portion 121 and the folded wall portion 122 of the cover member 120 can prevent the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 101 from flowing into the fluctuation display device 35 (direction device unit 200) side.

  In addition, since the folded wall 122 is formed so that the tip protrudes forward from the front surface of the stage unit 100, the game ball collides with the obstacle nail or the like in the game area 31 below the stage unit 100. Even if it jumps up, it is bounced back to the game area 31 side by the folding wall portion 122. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has jumped up from the game area 31 from entering the fluctuation display device 35 (direction device unit 200).

  The standing wall 121 of the cover member 120 communicates with an opening 121 a formed at a position corresponding to the first guide 102 and an opening 121 a and an outlet 104 that opens at the lower front of the stage unit 100. A passage 121b (see FIG. 6) is formed. The game ball that has flowed into the communication path 121b from the first guide portion 102 through the opening 121a is guided below the rolling surface 101 and discharged from the outlet 104 to the game area 31.

  Is the game ball guided from the warp passage 110 to the stage unit 100 rolling on the rolling surface 101 and then discharged from the first guide unit 102 through the communication passage 121b to the game area 31 from the outlet 104? Or from the second guide 103 to the game area 31. The outflow port 104 of the stage unit 100 is formed immediately above the first start winning prize port 37, whereas the second guide part 103 is arranged shifted to the left and right sides of the first starting winning prize port 37 ( 3 and FIG. 6), the probability that the game ball discharged from the outlet 104 is guided to the first start winning opening 37 is higher than the game ball discharged from the second guide portion 103.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 and 6, a distribution space (distribution space portion) 34 f into which game balls rolling on the guide portion 34 d of the center case 34 flow is formed in the upper right portion of the center case 34. The distribution space 34f is provided with a first pass gate portion 34g (first specific region, lottery gate) and a second pass gate portion 34h (second specific region, fixed gate) through which game balls can pass. ing. The game balls that have flowed into the distribution space 34f are distributed by the distribution device 90 and pass through the first passage gate portion 34g or the second passage gate portion 34h. The distribution device 90 is a device that switches the flow route of the game ball. The front surface of the first passage gate portion 34g is decorated with “variation” characters, and the front surface of the second passage gate portion 34h is decorated with “fixed” characters.

  As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7A, the sorting device 90 includes a fixed base 91 fixed to the back surface of the center case 34, a rotary motor 92 fixed in the fixed base 91, and the rotary motor 92. And a switching unit 93 that is driven to rotate and switches a flow-down route of the game ball.

  The switching unit 93 is a substantially columnar member, and has a protrusion 93a that protrudes in the radial direction from the outer peripheral surface. The switching unit 93 is accommodated in the distribution space 34 f of the center case 34 and is disposed so as to be rotatable with respect to the front surface of the center case 34.

  The rotation motor 92 is attached to a fixed base 91, and a disc portion 96 is fixed to a rotation shaft 92 a of the rotation motor 92. A projecting shaft 96a projecting forward is formed at the center of the disc portion 96, and a shaft portion (not shown) projecting from the back surface of the switching unit 93 is fixed to the projecting shaft 96a. Accordingly, the driving force of the rotary motor 92 is transmitted to the switching unit 93 via the disk unit 96.

  The disc portion 96 includes a notch portion 96b penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the initial position of the switching portion 93 is detected by the disc portion 96 having the notch portion 96b and the photosensor 97 disposed in the fixed base 91. The

  The photo sensor 97 includes a groove part through which the disk part 96 can pass, and a light emitting part and a light receiving part arranged so as to straddle the groove part. The light emitting part of the photosensor 97 irradiates light (infrared rays) toward the light receiving part. It is discriminated whether this light is in a light shielding state where light is shielded by the disk portion 96 or a light transmitting state where light is transmitted through the notch portion 96b of the disk portion 96. Is determined to be in the initial position. The rotational position of the switching unit 93 can be detected by the number of steps of the rotary motor 92 from the initial position.

  As shown in FIG. 7 (B), the first guiding path for guiding the game ball to the first passing gate portion 34g in the distribution space 34f by arranging the switching portion 93 in the center case 34. 94 and a second guide path 95 for guiding the game ball to the second passing gate portion 34h are formed.

  When the switching unit 93 is rotated by a predetermined amount clockwise in FIG. 7B by the rotary motor 92, the protrusion 93a of the switching unit 93 closes the upstream portion of the second guide path 95 and flows into the distribution space 34f. The sphere is guided to the first passage gate 34g through the first guide path 94. On the other hand, when the switching unit 93 is rotated by a predetermined amount in the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 7B by the rotary motor 92, the projection 93a of the switching unit 93 closes the upstream portion of the first guide path 94 and enters the distribution space 34f. The inflowing game ball is guided to the second passage gate portion 34h through the second guide path 95. The game balls that have passed through the first passage gate portion 34g and the second passage gate portion 34h are discharged to the game region 31 on the right side of the center case 34 through the discharge passage 98 formed in the lower portion of the distribution space 34f.

  The first passage gate portion 34g is provided with a first passage detection sensor 607a for detecting that the game ball has passed through the first passage gate portion 34g, and the second passage gate portion 34h is provided with a second game ball. A second passage detection sensor 607b that detects passing through the passage gate portion 34h is provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7A, two LED boards 99a and 99c are accommodated in the fixed base 91 of the sorting apparatus 90.

  A plurality of (five) LEDs 99b are provided along the first guide path 94 and the second guide path 95 on the front surface of the LED substrate 99a. By causing the LED 99b to emit light in accordance with the gaming state, a light emission effect is performed such that the first guide path 94 and the second guide path 95 are lit.

  The LED substrate 99c is disposed below the LED substrate 99a. On the front surface of the LED board 99c, four LEDs 99d are provided in a horizontal row along the discharge passage 98, and three notification LEDs 99e used for notification effects to be described later are provided in a horizontal row below.

  Lens members 61 to 63 are attached to the center case 34 in front of the notification LED 99e on the LED board 99c in correspondence with each notification LED 99e. The front surface of the lens member 61 disposed on the left side is decorated with “variation” characters, and the front surface of the lens member 63 disposed on the right side is decorated with “fixed” characters. The center lens member 62 is decorated with a letter “Aim”.

  By causing the notification LED 99e of the LED board 99c to emit light according to the gaming state, a notification effect is performed via the lens members 61 to 63 described above. Details of the notification effect will be described later with reference to FIGS. 104 to 105. In addition, by causing the LED 99d of the LED board 99c to emit light according to the gaming state, a light emission effect is performed such that the discharge passage 98 shines.

  In the gaming machine 1, no lens member is provided in front of the LED 99b of the LED board 99a and the LED 99d of the LED board 99c, but a lens member may be provided as necessary.

[Director unit]
Next, with reference to FIG.4 and FIG.8, the rendering device unit (back surface constituent member) 200 will be described. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the rendering device unit 200.

  The effect device unit 200 includes a unit base member 210 fixed to the back surface of the game board 30, a rear effect device 300, a lower effect device 220, an upper decoration unit 240, and a lower decoration unit housed in the unit base member 210. 260. The upper effect unit 400 and the right effect device 500 are attached to the upper decoration unit 240.

  The unit base member 210 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the unit base member 210.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the unit base member 210 is a frame composed of a back wall 211 and a side wall 212 that rises forward from the outer peripheral edge of the back wall 211 and houses various devices. It is configured to be possible.

  The game board 32 of the game board 30 of the gaming machine 1 is made of resin, and the board thickness of the game board 32 is thinner than that of a conventional wooden game board. In the gaming machine 1, a spacer member 213 is integrally formed at the front end of the side wall 212 of the unit base member 210 in order to compensate for the reduced thickness of the game board 32 (the spacer member 213 may be attached as a separate member). good). When the unit base member 210 is mounted on the game board 32 and the thickness in the front-rear direction is thin, it is difficult to fix the unit base member 210 by engaging with the front frame 5, but the unit base member 210 has a thickness in the front-rear direction. Since the spacer member 213 is provided, the thickness in the front-rear direction when the unit base member 210 is installed on the game board 32 is the same as that in the prior art, and the front base frame 5 can be engaged (stored appropriately).

  The spacer member 213 located at the upper right corner of the unit base member 210 has a notch 213a. The notch 213a is necessary for grounding the game board 30 and is disposed at a position corresponding to the charge removal unit 900 (see FIG. 3).

  In the gaming machine 1, the spacer member 213 is formed in a frame shape along the side wall 212 of the unit base member 210. However, the spacer member 213 is formed only in the four corners on the left, right, upper, and lower sides of the unit base member 210. May be. Further, since the spacer member 213 can be visually recognized through the transparent game board 32, a decorative sheet or a decorative seal may be attached to the front surface of the spacer member 213 to enhance the decorativeness.

  An upper portion of the rear wall 211 of the unit base member 210 is recessed rearward. A space surrounded by the upper portion of the back wall 211 and the side wall 212 is an upper housing space 214 for housing the back side production device 300 and the upper decoration unit 240, and is a space surrounded by the lower portion of the back wall 211 and the side wall 212. Is a lower housing space 215 that houses the lower rendering device 220 and the lower decorative unit 260.

  4 and 9, a display unit 70 having a variable display device 35 is disposed on the back surface of the upper portion of the unit base member 210, and a game control device is disposed on the back surface of the lower portion of the unit base member 210. A main control unit 80 having 600 is arranged.

  A window 216 is formed in the upper portion of the back wall 211 at a position corresponding to the display unit 35 a of the variable display device 35. The display unit 35 a of the variable display device 35 is visible through the window unit 216.

  Further, four relay boards that are electrically connected to the game control device 600 and various devices are attached to the back surface of the lower portion of the back wall 211. As shown by the broken lines in FIG. 9, surrounding walls surrounding the four relay boards are formed on the back wall 211. The surrounding wall is a wall member that stands rearward from the back surface of the back wall 211.

  An opening 217 for allowing a game ball guided to the lower side of the game board 30 through the lower decoration unit 260 to pass therethrough is formed in the side wall 212 located at the lower portion of the unit base member 210. In addition, on the curved side wall 212 located on the left side of the unit base member 210, wiring openings 212a and 212b are formed through which the wiring of electrical components disposed on the game board 30 is passed. Details of the electrical component wiring process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  The spacer member 213 located in the lower right part of the unit base member 210 is provided with a storage portion 218 for storing the drawer connector board 219, and the drawer connector is placed on the rear wall of the storage portion behind the game board. An opening is formed to allow it to face. A drawer connector board (not shown) is also provided in the lower right portion of the storage portion 5a provided in the inner frame 5. When the game board 30 is stored in the storage portion 5a, the game board 30 and the inner frame 5 Drawer connectors connect to each other. By connecting two drawer connectors, various electrical components on the game board 30 side (game control device 600, production control device 700, etc.) and various electrical components on the inner frame 5 side (power supply device 600, payout control device 640, etc.) Can be electrically connected. When a wire harness is used for connecting electrical components, wiring and the like are complicated. However, since the gaming machine 1 uses a drawer connector board, the connection work can be simplified.

[Lower production device]
Next, the lower effect device 220 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the lower effect device 220. FIG. 11A is a rear view of the movable part of the lower effect device 220, and FIG. 11B is a perspective view of the lower effect device 220.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 10, the lower rendering device 220 includes a flat fixed base 221, a cover member 222 attached to the front surface of the fixed base 221, and a storage space between the fixed base 221 and the cover member 222. A movable decorative member 223 accommodated in a vertically movable manner and a drive motor 230 for driving the movable decorative member 223 are provided.

  The fixed base 221 is a substantially rectangular plate member, and is fixed to the back wall 211 (see FIG. 9) below the unit base member 210.

  The cover member 222 is a lid member attached to the fixed base 221 so as to cover the front surface of the fixed base 221. An accommodation space that can accommodate various members is formed between the cover member 222 and the fixed base 221.

  The cover member 222 has a housing recess 222a that houses the decorative body 224 of the movable decorative member 223 when the movable decorative member 223, which will be described later, is at the lower limit position (initial position). The upper surface wall 222b of the cover member 222 is decorated with characters, and the front wall 222c of the cover member 222 is formed with a wiring opening 222d for allowing electric wiring connected to the drive motor 230 and the like to pass therethrough. Yes.

  The movable decorative member 223 includes a decorative body 224 and a slide plate 225 fixed to the back surface of the decorative body 224, and is configured to be movable up and down between a lower limit position (initial position) and an upper limit position.

  The decorative body 224 is a disk-shaped member, and character decoration is applied to the front surface of the decorative body 224. Note that an LED substrate may be provided inside the decorative body 224, and the decorative body 224 may be caused to emit light using an LED provided on the LED substrate.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11A, the slide plate 225 is a plate-like member extending in the vertical direction. The upper portion of the slide plate 225 is fixed to the back surface of the decorative body 224, and the lower portion of the slide plate 225 is configured to extend downward from the decorative body 224. The slide plate 225 is attached to the guide member 226 fixed to the center of the front surface of the fixed base 221 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. The guide member 226 extends in the vertical direction, and the guide member 226 has a U-shaped cross section.

  When the slide plate 225 is attached to the guide member 226, the rear end side of the slide plate 225 is inserted into the guide member 226, and the front end side of the slide plate 225 is exposed without being inserted into the guide member 226. A rack gear 225a is formed on the right side of the exposed slide plate 225 in the vertical direction.

  The drive motor 230 is a drive source that moves the movable decorative member 223 up and down. The drive motor 230 is fixed to the back surface of the cover member 222 so that the output shaft 231 faces rearward. A main drive gear 232 is fixed to the output shaft 231 of the drive motor 230.

  The main driving gear 232 meshes with a first driven gear 233 that is rotatably supported by a first shaft 221 a that is formed to protrude from the fixed base 221. The first driven gear 233 meshes with a second driven gear 234 that is rotatably supported by a second shaft 221 b that is formed to protrude from the fixed base 221. The second driven gear 234 meshes with the rack gear 225 a of the slide plate 225 of the movable decorative member 223.

  In the lower rendering device 220 configured as described above, the movable decorative member 223 is controlled to move up and down between the lower limit position and the upper limit position according to the gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 8, when the effect by the lower effect device 220 is not executed, the drive motor 230 is stopped and the movable decorative member 223 is located at the lower limit position. As described above, when the movable decorative member 223 is at the lower limit position, the decorative body 224 is located behind the cover member 120 (see FIG. 3) and is hardly visible.

  Note that a substantially U-shaped photo sensor 235 is disposed on the fixed base 221, and when the movable decorative member 223 is at the lower limit position, the lower end of the slide plate 225 of the movable decorative member 223 is the concave portion of the photo sensor 235. The light emitted from the photosensor 235 is shielded. Therefore, it is possible to detect whether or not the movable decorative member 223 is at the lower limit position (initial position) by detecting whether the photosensor 235 is in a light-transmitting state or a light-blocking state.

  When the game progresses in the gaming machine 1 and reaches a predetermined gaming state, the drive motor 230 is driven to rotate forward, and the driving force of the drive motor 230 is applied to the slide plate 225 via the gears 233, 234 and 235. Communicated. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11B, the slide plate 225 is raised, and the movable decorative member 223 is raised to the upper limit position. When the movable decorative member 223 is raised to the upper limit position in this way, the entire decorative body 224 becomes visible by the player.

  Thereafter, the drive motor 230 is driven in reverse and the slide plate 225 is lowered, whereby the movable decorative member 223 returns from the upper limit position to the initial position. In addition, the vibration effect which vibrates the movable decoration member 223 up and down can also be performed by repeating forward rotation and reverse rotation of the drive motor 230 alternately.

[Back side production device]
Next, the back side production device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the back side production device 300. FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view of the left shutter unit 330 of the back side rendering device 300. FIG. FIG. 14 is a view for explaining the turning operation of the turning door 340 of the left shutter unit 330. FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining the sliding operation of the left shutter unit 330.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 12, the back side production apparatus 300 includes a frame-shaped base frame 310, a cover frame 320 attached to the front side of the base frame 310, and between the base frame 310 and the cover frame 320. It includes a pair of shutter units 330 that are slidably movable in the left-right direction, and a drive unit 360 that drives the shutter units 330.

  The base frame 310 is a flat frame and is fixed to the upper part of the back wall 211 of the unit base member 210. The base frame 310 includes an opening 311 that allows the display unit 35 a of the variable display device 35 to be visible at a position corresponding to the window 216 of the unit base member 210.

  The cover frame 320 is a frame formed corresponding to the shape of the base frame 310 and is fixed to the base frame 310 so as to cover the front surface of the base frame 310. The cover frame 320 includes an opening 321 that allows the display unit 35 a of the variable display device 35 to be visible at a position corresponding to the window 216 of the unit base member 210.

  As shown in FIG. 12, a pair of shutter units 330 is provided between the base frame 310 and the cover frame 320. These shutter units 330 are configured to slide in the left-right direction between a position (initial position) on the side of the display section 35a of the variable display device 35 and a position (center position) in front of the display section 35a. Has been. Accordingly, the space in which the shutter unit 330 is accommodated is set to the side of the display unit 35a of the variable display device 35 and is set in front of the display unit 35a. It is divided into an effect area that operates.

  An arrangement space for arranging a drive unit 360 for driving the shutter unit 330 is formed between the upper part of the base frame 310 and the upper part of the cover frame 320. This arrangement space communicates with a space (standby area and effect area) in which the shutter unit 330 is accommodated.

  The pair of shutter units 330 are disposed apart from each other in the left-right direction. The left shutter unit 330 and the right shutter unit 330 are configured to be symmetrical. Since these shutter units 330 are members having the same function, the configuration of the left shutter unit 330 will be mainly described, and the description of the configuration of the right shutter unit 330 will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the left shutter unit 330 includes a slide member 331, a decoration member 334 attached to the front surface of the slide member 331, and a rotation provided to be rotatable with respect to the slide member 331 and the decoration member 334. A door 340 and a drive motor 350 that rotationally drives the rotary door 340 are provided.

  The slide member 331 is a substantially U-shaped member when viewed from the front, and includes an accommodation recess 331a for accommodating the drive motor 350 in the upper front portion.

  At the upper end surface of the slide member 331, an attachment portion 332 is formed that is slidably attached to a guide rod 322 (see FIGS. 12 and 15) that is horizontally fixed to the upper part of the back surface of the cover frame 320. A bearing hole 332a is formed through the mounting portion 332 in the left-right direction, and the guide rod 322 is inserted into the bearing hole 332a of the mounting portion 332.

  A belt fixing portion 333 that is fixed to an endless belt 375 of a drive unit 360 described later is formed on the upper end surface of the block-shaped attachment portion 332. A through hole 333a is formed in the belt fixing portion 333 in the left-right direction, and the belt fixing portion 333 is attached to the endless belt 375 through the through hole 333a.

  The decorative member 334 is a member provided so as to cover the front surface of the slide member 331, and the front surface of the decorative member 334 is decorated such as plating. In a state where the decorative member 334 is installed on the slide member 331, the drive motor 350 is concealed by the decorative member 334.

  The upper part of the slide member 331 and the decorative member 334 is formed as an upper protruding part 330a (see FIG. 12) that protrudes toward the other shutter unit 330, and the lower part of the slide member 331 and the decorative member 334 is the other part. It is formed as a lower protruding portion 330b (see FIG. 12) protruding toward the shutter unit 330 side. When the left and right shutter units 330 have moved to the center position, the upper and lower protrusions 330a and 330b of the left shutter unit 330 and the upper and lower protrusions 330a and 330b of the right shutter unit 330 are displayed. And face each other with a minute gap.

  The rotating door 340 is a movable member that rotates with respect to the slide member 331 and the decorative member 334. The revolving door 340 includes a first base 341, a second base 342 fixed to the back side of the first base 341, and an LED substrate disposed in a housing space between the first base 341 and the second base 342. 343.

  The first base 341 is a substantially rectangular light-transmitting member, and has a character decoration on the surface (see FIG. 14A). An upper rotating shaft 341 a that protrudes upward is formed on the upper right end surface of the first base 341, and a lower rotating shaft 341 b that protrudes downward is formed on the lower right end surface of the first base 341.

  The second base 342 fixed to the back surface of the first base 341 is a substantially rectangular light-transmitting member, and has a decorative surface on the surface (see FIG. 14B). A pair of upper and lower magnetic bodies are accommodated at a position on the front surface of the second base 342 and closer to the side of the first base 341 opposite to the side on which the upper rotation shaft 341a and the lower rotation shaft 341b are provided. A portion 342a is formed. The magnetic body 344 is accommodated in these magnetic body accommodating parts 342a.

  The LED substrate 343 is fixed to the back surface of the first base 341 in the accommodation space between the first base 341 and the second base 342. The LED substrate 343 includes a plurality of LEDs 343a, and is disposed on the first base 341 so that the LEDs 343a are oriented sideways. The LED 343a is a common light source that causes the front surface and the back surface (the first base 341 and the second base 342) of the rotating door 340 to emit light simultaneously. Thus, by simultaneously emitting light on the front surface and the back surface of the revolving door 340, it is possible to produce a light emission effect using the entire revolving door 340 and enhance the effect. Further, the number of parts is reduced as compared with the case where LEDs for causing the front and back surfaces of the rotary door 340 to emit light are provided separately.

  The pivot door 340 includes an upper pivot shaft 341 a and a lower pivot shaft 341 b that are inserted into a pair of bearing holes 334 a formed in the upper and lower portions of the decorative member 334, respectively. It is possible to rotate with respect to. The upper turning shaft 341 a of the turning door 340 is connected to the output shaft of the drive motor 350 via the connecting member 351.

  As shown in FIG. 14A, when the rotation effect by the rotation door 340 is not executed, the drive motor 350 is stopped, and the surface of the first base 341 becomes the front surface of the rotation door 340. The character decoration applied to the surface of the first base 341 becomes visible. On the other hand, when the rotation effect by the rotation door 340 is executed, the drive motor 350 is driven, and the surface of the second base 342 is the front surface of the rotation door 340 as shown in FIG. Thus, the character decoration applied to the surface of the second base 342 becomes visible.

  As shown in FIGS. 12 and 15, the drive unit 360 that drives the pair of shutter units 330 is accommodated in the arrangement space between the upper part of the base frame 310 and the upper part of the cover frame 320. The drive unit 360 includes a left drive mechanism 370 that drives the left shutter unit 330 and a right drive mechanism 380 that drives the right shutter unit 330.

  The left drive mechanism 370 includes a drive motor 371 that is fixed to the upper rear surface of the cover frame 320 so that the output shaft faces rearward, a main pulley 372 that is fixed to the output shaft of the drive motor 371, and left and right sides of the main pulley 372. Two driven pulleys 373 and 374 disposed on the side, and an endless belt 375 wound around the pulleys 372, 373 and 374.

  The driven pulley 373 is provided on the left side of the drive motor 371 and is pivotally supported via fixed shafts 361 whose ends are fixed to the base frame 310 and the cover frame 320, respectively. The driven pulley 374 is provided on the right side of the drive motor 371 and is pivotally supported via a fixed shaft 362 whose ends are fixed to the base frame 310 and the cover frame 320, respectively.

  A belt fixing portion 333 of the left shutter unit 330 is fixed to an endless belt 375 located between the driven pulleys 373 and 374.

  On the other hand, the right drive mechanism 380 includes a drive motor 381 fixed to the upper front portion of the base frame 310 so that the output shaft faces forward, a main driving pulley 382 fixed to the output shaft of the driving motor 381, and a main driving pulley 382. Two driven pulleys 383 and 384 disposed on the left and right sides, and an endless belt 385 wound around the pulleys 382, 383, and 384 are provided.

  The driven pulley 383 is provided on the left side of the drive motor 381 and is pivotally supported via a fixed shaft 362 that pivotally supports the driven pulley 374 of the left drive mechanism 370. Thus, the fixed shaft 362 is a common shaft that supports both the driven pulleys 374 and 383. The driven pulley 384 is provided on the right side of the drive motor 381 and is pivotally supported via a fixed shaft 363 whose ends are fixed to the base frame 310 and the cover frame 320, respectively.

  A belt fixing portion 333 of the right shutter unit 330 is fixed to an endless belt 385 positioned between the driven pulleys 383 and 384.

  When the production by the back side production apparatus 300 is not executed, the drive motors 371 and 381 of the drive unit 360 are stopped, and the left and right shutter units 330 are located at the initial position (standby position) in the standby area. Yes. Thus, when the shutter unit 330 is in the initial position, the shutter unit 330 is located behind the upper decoration unit 240 (see FIG. 8), and almost the entire shutter unit 330 is hardly visible. Yes. Since the upper decoration unit 240 is disposed in front of the shutter unit 330, the rotation effect by the rotation door 340 is impossible in the shutter unit 330 stopped in the standby area. That is, the standby area is set to a width (front / rear width) in which the pivot door 340 of the shutter unit 330 is not pivotable.

  Note that a substantially U-shaped photosensor 335 (see FIG. 12) is disposed on the left side of the cover frame 320, and when the left shutter unit 330 is in the initial position, the slide member 331 of the shutter unit 330 has A light shielding plate 331b (see FIG. 15) formed on the left end surface is inserted into the concave portion of the photosensor 335 so as to shield the light emitted from the photosensor 335. Therefore, it is possible to detect whether the left shutter unit 330 is in the initial position by detecting whether the photosensor 335 is in a light-transmitting state or a light-blocking state.

  A substantially U-shaped photo sensor 336 (see FIG. 12) is disposed on the right side of the cover frame 320, and when the right shutter unit 330 is in the initial position, the slide member 331 of the shutter unit 330 has A light shielding plate 331b (see FIG. 12) formed on the right end surface is inserted into the concave portion of the photosensor 336 so as to shield the light emitted from the photosensor 336. Therefore, it is possible to detect whether the right shutter unit 330 is in the initial position by detecting whether the photosensor 336 is in a light-transmitting state or a light-blocking state.

  When the game progresses in the gaming machine 1 and enters a predetermined gaming state, the drive motor 371 of the drive unit 360 is driven in reverse, and the endless belt so that the left shutter unit 330 moves rightward from the initial position. 375 rotates. At this time, the drive motor 381 of the drive unit 360 is rotated forward, and the endless belt 385 rotates so that the right shutter unit 330 moves to the left from the initial position. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 15, the left and right shutter units 330 slide along the guide rods 322 from the standby area to the effect area in front of the display unit 35 a of the variable display device 35.

  Note that a protruding piece 331 c is formed to project downward on the lower end surface of the slide member 331 of each shutter unit 330, and each protruding piece 331 c is formed between the lower part of the base frame 310 and the lower part of the cover frame 320. A guide groove (not shown) is slidably inserted. Since the upper part of the shutter unit 330 is guided along the guide rod 322 via the mounting portion 332, and the lower part of the shutter unit 330 is guided along the guide groove via the protruding piece 331c, the shutter unit 330 slides smoothly. Can be moved.

  When the shutter unit 330 moves from the initial position in the standby area to the center position in the effect area, almost the entire shutter unit 330 can be visually recognized by the player. In the effect area, a member that prevents the rotating operation of the rotating door 340 is not provided in front of the shutter unit 330, and the rotating operation of the rotating door 340 is possible. That is, the effect area is set to a width (front / rear width) in which the rotating door 340 of the shutter unit 330 can rotate.

  In the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the left and right shutter units 330 are slid from the initial position in the standby area to the center position in the effect area, and then the rotating door 340 of each shutter unit 330 is rotated. By controlling the rendering operation in this way, it is possible to efficiently use the space such as the standby area and the rendering area around the variable display device 35, and to enhance the rendering effect by the back side rendering device 300.

  Further, the shutter unit 330 is configured to slide in the left-right direction in the effect area from the standby area, and the pivot door 340 provided in the shutter unit 330 is rotated using the space in the front-rear direction of the effect area. Thus, different rendering operations can be realized in one back side production device 300, and the production effect of the back side production device 300 can be further enhanced. In addition, space saving around the standby area can be achieved.

  Since the upper decorative unit 240 is disposed in front of the standby area of the shutter unit 330, the decorativeness around the standby area can be improved. In this embodiment, the upper decoration unit 240 is disposed in front of the shutter unit 330 in the standby area. However, the upper decoration unit 240 is disposed behind the shutter unit 330 in the standby area (the back surface portion of the standby area). A decorative member such as 240 may be provided. In this case, when the shutter unit 330 moves from the standby area, the decorative member is visible.

  In the rear rendering device 300, an arrangement space for arranging the drive unit 360 is formed between the upper part of the base frame 310 and the upper part of the cover frame 320, and the shutter unit 330 operates in this arrangement space. It is comprised so that it may communicate with the space (standby area | region and production area) to do. When the drive unit 360 is driven, the movement of the endless belts 375 and 385 and the shutter units 330 stirs the air in the installation space of the drive unit 360 and the air in the space in which the shutter unit 330 operates, Heat generation of the drive motors 371 and 381 constituting the drive unit 360 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress failure or malfunction of electrical drive sources such as the drive motors 371 and 381.

[Lower decoration unit]
Next, the lower decoration unit 260 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 16 to 20.

  FIG. 16 is an exploded perspective view of the lower decoration unit 260. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the intermediate member 290 constituting the lower decoration unit 260. FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the decorative member 270 attached to the intermediate member 290. FIG. 19A is an enlarged front view of a part of the lower decorative unit 260, and FIG. 19B is a longitudinal sectional view of the lower decorative unit 260 along the BB plane of FIG. 19A. FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the flow path component 280 that constitutes the lower decorative unit 260.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the lower decoration unit 260 is accommodated in the lower accommodation space 215 of the unit base member 210 in a state of being disposed in front of the lower effect device 220. The lower decoration unit 260 functions as a member that decorates the lower portion of the game area 31 and also functions as a member that guides a game ball that has won a prize opening or the like to the ball collection port 5c (see FIG. 2) of the front frame 5. The game balls collected from the ball collection port 5c of the front frame 5 are guided to the outside of the gaming machine 1 through a guide path (not shown).

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 16, the lower decoration unit 260 is disposed on the flow path component 280, the intermediate member 290 disposed on the front surface of the flow path component member 280, and the front surface of the intermediate member 290. The LED board 261 and the decoration member 270 arrange | positioned so that the front surface of the intermediate member 290 may be provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the intermediate member 290 is a substantially rectangular plate member. The intermediate member 290 guides the game balls won in the first special variation winning device 41 and the first guide rod 291 that guides the game balls won in the first start prize opening 37 and the second start prize opening 38. A guide rod 292 and a guide path 293 for guiding the game ball won in the general winning opening 40 are provided.

  The first guide rod 291 is formed at the center of the intermediate member 290 corresponding to the first start winning opening 37 and the second starting winning opening 38 provided in the game area 31 (see FIG. 3). The first guide rod 291 is a game ball rolling path extending in the front-rear direction, and is formed so as to penetrate the intermediate member 290 in the front-rear direction. The first guide rod 291 guides the game ball won in the first start winning opening 37 and the second start winning opening 38 from the front to the rear of the intermediate member 290.

  The second guide rod 292 is formed on the right side of the first guide rod 291 corresponding to the first special variation winning device 41 provided in the game area 31. The second guide rod 292 is a game ball rolling path extending in the front-rear direction, and is formed so as to penetrate the intermediate member 290 in the front-rear direction. The second guide rod 292 guides the game ball won in the first special variation winning device 41 from the front to the rear of the intermediate member 290.

  The guide path 293 is formed corresponding to each of the four general winning ports 40 provided in the game area 31. Three guide paths 293 are provided on the left side of the first guide bar 291, and one guide path 293 is provided on the right side of the second guide bar 292. The guide path 293 is a game ball rolling path extending in the front-rear direction, and is formed so as to penetrate the intermediate member 290 in the front-rear direction. The guide path 293 guides the game ball won in the general winning opening 40 from the front to the rear of the intermediate member 290.

  Further, the intermediate member 290 has three attachment holes 294 (see FIG. 16) for attaching the magnetic sensor 23. The attachment holes 294 pass through the intermediate member 290 in the front-rear direction, and the three attachment holes 294 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction. The magnetic sensor 23 is inserted into the attachment hole 294 from the back side of the intermediate member 290 and fixed to the intermediate member 290. In a state of being fixed to the intermediate member 290, the tip portion of the magnetic sensor 23 projects forward of the intermediate member 290.

  The LED substrate 261 is fixed to the front surface of the intermediate member 290. The LED board 261 includes a plurality of LEDs 261 a that emit light toward the front, five openings 261 b that pass through the first guide rod 291, the second guide rod 292, and the guide path 293 of the intermediate member 290, and a magnetic sensor And three passage holes 261c through which the passage 23 passes.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 and 18, the decorative member 270 is a substantially rectangular plate-shaped translucent member, and various decorations such as character decorations are provided on the front surface of the decorative member 270. The decorative member 270 is attached to the intermediate member 290 so as to cover the LED substrate 261. In a state where the lower decoration unit 260 is provided in the gaming machine 1, the decoration member 270 of the lower decoration unit 260 is located behind the cover member 120 (see FIGS. 3 and 4), and the upper half of the decoration member 270 is It becomes visible through the transparent cover member 120 and the game board 32.

  The decorative member 270 includes a collar housing portion 271 that houses the first guide rod 291 of the intermediate member 290, a through hole 272 that allows the second guide rod 292 to pass therethrough, and a through hole 273 that allows the guide path 293 to pass therethrough.

  The heel housing portion 271 is formed in the central portion of the decorative member 270. In a state where the decorative member 270 is installed on the intermediate member 290, the first guide rod 291 of the intermediate member 290 is accommodated in the rod accommodating portion 271. A through hole 271a is formed on the front side wall of the basket housing portion 271 to receive the game balls won in the first start winning port 37 and the second start winning port 38 into the bag housing portion 271.

  Further, in a state where the decorative member 270 is installed on the intermediate member 290, the second guide rod 292 of the intermediate member 290 projects forward of the decorative member 270 through the through hole 272, and each guide path 293 of the intermediate member 290 has each through hole. 273 protrudes forward of the decorative member 270.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 and 18, the decorative member 270 described above further includes a magnetic sensor housing portion 274 that houses the magnetic sensor 23 and a radio wave sensor housing portion 276 that houses the radio wave sensor 24.

  The radio wave sensor housing 276 is provided in the lower left portion of the decorative member 270. The radio wave sensor 24 is attached in the radio wave sensor housing portion 276.

  The magnetic sensor housing portion 274 is disposed corresponding to the three magnetic sensors 23 fixed to the intermediate member 290. The three magnetic sensor accommodating portions 274 are provided on the front upper portion of the decorative member 270 at a position where the player can visually recognize the game plate 32 through the game board 32.

  As shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B, the magnetic sensor housing portion 274 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape and has an insertion hole 274a into which the tip portion of the magnetic sensor 23 is inserted. . Therefore, when the decorative member 270 is installed on the intermediate member 290, the distal end portion of the magnetic sensor 23 fixed to the intermediate member 290 is inserted into the insertion hole 274 a of the magnetic sensor housing portion 274 of the decorative member 270. The magnetic sensor 23 housed in the magnetic sensor housing portion 274 detects magnetism within a predetermined range around the game area 31 where the magnetic sensor 23 is disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 18, the upper part of the front surface of the decorative member 270 has the same outer shape as the outer shape of the magnetic sensor housing portion 274 at a position that can be visually recognized by the player through the game board 32. Two dummy accommodating portions 275 are provided. The dummy housing portion 275 is disposed at a position outside the magnetic detection range (or within the magnetic detection range) of the magnetic sensor 23 housed in the magnetic sensor housing portion 274. By providing the dummy accommodating portion 275 on the decorative member 270 as described above, it is possible to increase the deterrence against magnetic fraud without increasing the number of the magnetic sensors 23.

  In addition, although the two dummy accommodating parts 275 were formed in the decoration member 270, the number of the dummy accommodating parts 275 is arbitrarily determined as needed.

  In the lower decoration unit 260 configured as described above, the game balls won in the first start winning opening 37 and the second starting winning opening 38 are intermediate members from the front of the decoration member 270 through the through hole 271a and the first guide rod 291. The game ball guided to the rear of 290 and having won the first special variation winning device 41 is guided from the front of the decorative member 270 to the rear of the intermediate member 290 through the second guide rod 292. In addition, the game balls won in each general winning opening 40 are guided from the front of the decorative member 270 to the rear of the intermediate member 290 through the respective guide paths 293. Thus, the game ball guided to the rear of the intermediate member 290 flows into various channels on the front side of the channel component 280.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 and 20, the flow path component member 280 is fixed to the back surface of the intermediate member 290, and a frame that forms various flow paths between the back surface of the intermediate member 290 and the front surface of the flow path component member 280. Is the body.

  The flow path component 280 includes a start winning port channel 281 that guides the game ball flowing in from the first guide rod 291 downward, and a first big prize port that guides the game ball flowing in from the second guide rod 292 downward. A general winning port 283 that guides the game balls flowing in from the left three guiding paths 293 downward, and a general winning port that guides the gaming balls flowing in from the one guiding path 293 on the right. A flow path 284, a second large winning opening channel 285 for guiding the game balls won in the second special variation winning device 42 downward, and a merge channel 286 where the game balls flowing down from these flow paths 281 to 285 merge. .

  The start winning opening channel 281 is formed at the center of the front surface of the channel component 280. The upstream portion of the start winning port channel 281 communicates with the first guide rod 291, and the downstream portion of the start winning port channel 281 communicates with the combined channel 286. The game ball that has flowed in from the first guide rod 291 flows down the start winning opening channel 281 and is guided to the combined channel 286.

  The first big winning opening channel 282 is formed in the flow path component 280 on the right side of the starting winning port channel 281. The upstream portion of the first big winning opening channel 282 communicates with the second guide rod 292, and the downstream portion of the first big winning port channel 282 communicates with the combined flow channel 286. The game ball that has flowed in from the second guide rod 292 flows down the first big prize opening channel 282 and is guided to the combined channel 286.

  The general winning opening channel 283 is formed in the flow path component 280 on the left side of the starting winning port channel 281. The upstream portion of the general winning opening channel 283 is branched into three channels, and these three channels communicate with each of the three guide channels 293. The downstream portion of the general prize opening channel 283 is one channel in which the three upstream channels gather, and communicates with the combined channel 286. The game balls that have flowed in from the three left guide paths 293 flow down the general winning opening channel 283 and are guided to the combined channel 286. A winning port switch 604 a for detecting that a game ball has won the general winning port 40 is provided at the outlet of the general winning port channel 283.

  The general winning opening channel 284 is formed in the flow path component 280 on the right side of the first large winning port channel 282. The upstream portion of the general winning opening channel 284 communicates with the right guide passage 293, and the downstream portion of the general winning opening channel 284 communicates with the combined flow channel 286. The game ball that has flowed in from the right guide path 293 flows down the general winning opening channel 284 and is guided to the combined channel 286. A winning port switch 604b for detecting that a game ball has won the general winning port 40 is provided at the exit of the general winning port channel 284.

  The second big winning opening channel 285 is formed in the channel constituting member 280 on the left side of the general winning port channel 283. The upstream portion of the second large winning opening channel 285 communicates with the downstream end of the winning ball channel 44 (see FIGS. 6 and 21) through which the game balls won in the second special variable winning device 42 flow down, The downstream portion of the winning opening channel 285 communicates with the combined channel 286. The game balls that have flowed in from the winning ball channel 44 flow down the second large winning port channel 285 and are guided to the combined channel 286.

  The combined flow path 286 is provided in the lower part of the front surface of the flow path constituting member 280 and is formed to roll inflowing game balls forward of the gaming machine 1. The game ball rolling on the combined channel 286 is guided to the ball collection port 5c (see FIG. 2) of the front frame 5 through the opening 217 formed in the unit base member 210, and passes through a guide path (not shown). 1 to the outside.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the flow path component 280 has wiring openings 287 for leading the electrical wiring of various sensors such as the magnetic sensor 23 to the outside.

  In the lower decoration unit 260 described above, the magnetic sensor 23 is fixed to the intermediate member 290, and the magnetic sensor housing portion 274 for housing the magnetic sensor 23 is provided in the decoration member 270. You may arrange | position between the board | plates 32. FIG. Further, the radio wave sensor 24 may be disposed between the decorative member 270 and the game board 32 instead of being disposed in the radio wave sensor housing portion 276 of the decorative member 270.

[Upper decoration unit]
Next, the upper decoration unit 240 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decoration unit 240.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 21, the upper decoration unit 240 is accommodated in the upper accommodation space 214 of the unit base member 210 in a state of being disposed in front of the back side production device 300.

  The upper decoration unit 240 includes a left decoration portion 241 that extends in the vertical direction along the left edge of the display portion 35a of the variable display device 35, and a right decoration portion that extends in the vertical direction along the right edge of the display portion 35a. 242 and an upper decoration portion 243 extending in the left-right direction along the upper edge of the display portion 35a. The upper decoration unit 240 is configured in a substantially U shape when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the left decorative portion 241 is disposed behind the left game area 31 including the normal start gate 36 (see FIG. 3). A winning ball flow path 44 through which a game ball won in the second special variation winning device 42 flows down is attached to the back surface of the left decorative portion 241.

  The winning ball flow path 44 includes an upstream flow path 44a that guides the game balls won in the second special variation winning device 42 in the left-right direction, and a downstream flow that is connected to the upstream flow path 44a and guides the game balls downward. And a path 44b.

  The downstream flow path 44b of the winning ball flow path 44 is fixed to the back surface of the left decorative part 241 and the upstream flow path 44a connected to the upper part of the downstream flow path 44b passes through the cutout part 241a of the left decorative part 241. It extends to the right side of the left decorative portion 241. The upstream flow path 44a is disposed along the lower surface of the upper decorative portion 243, and the upstream end of the upstream flow path 44a is connected to the winning ball flow path 44 provided in the center case (front surface component) 34, and the second A game ball that has won a prize at the second grand prize opening of the special variable prize winning device 42 flows in. Further, the downstream end of the downstream flow path 44b of the winning ball flow path 44 is connected to the upstream portion of the second large winning opening channel 285 (see FIG. 20) of the lower decoration unit 260 described above.

  A magnetic sensor housing portion 241b for housing the magnetic sensor 23 is formed in the left decorative portion 241 located behind the usual start gate 36. The magnetism around the usual start gate 36 (see FIG. 31) is detected by the magnetic sensor 23 housed in the magnetic sensor housing portion 241b. On the other hand, in the upper decoration portion 243 near the position where the large winning opening solenoid 28b (see FIG. 32) of the second special variable winning device 42 is disposed, a dummy housing having the same outer shape as the magnetic sensor housing portion 241b is accommodated. A portion 243b is provided. The dummy accommodating portion 243b is disposed at a position outside the magnetic detection range (or within the magnetic detection range) of the magnetic sensor 23 accommodated in the magnetic sensor accommodating portion 241b. If a magnetic sensor is arranged around the big prize opening solenoid 28b, the magnetic sensor detects the magnetic force when the solenoid is driven, and there is a possibility of misjudging the magnetism. Therefore, in the vicinity of the big prize opening solenoid 28b, not the magnetic sensor housing portion for housing the magnetic sensor but the dummy housing portion 243b is arranged to prevent magnetic fraud with respect to the second special variable winning device 42. Note that a magnetic sensor whose detection accuracy is lowered to the extent that the magnetic force from the special prize opening solenoid 28b is not detected may be disposed in the vicinity of the special prize opening solenoid 28b.

  The left decorative portion 241, the right decorative portion 242, and the upper decorative portion 243 are translucent members, and one LED substrate 244 is fixed to the back surfaces of these decorative portions 241, 242, and 243. On the front surface of the LED substrate 244, a plurality of LEDs 244a that irradiate light to the left decorative portion 241, the right decorative portion 242, and the upper decorative portion 243 are provided.

  In addition, an attachment recess 243a for attaching the upper effect device 400 is formed on the front surface of the upper decoration portion 243, and an attachment recess 242a for attaching the right effect device 500 is formed on the front surface of the right decoration portion 242. ing.

  In the state where the top effect device 400 is installed in the mounting recess 243 a of the upper decoration portion 243, the upper effect device 400 is in the opening (display window portion) 34 a of the center case 34 and is displayed on the variable display device 35. It is located above the part 35a (see FIG. 3). Further, in a state where the right portion rendering device 500 is installed in the mounting recess 242a of the right decorative portion 242, the right portion rendering device 500 is in the opening (display window portion) 34a of the center case 34 and is displayed in a variable manner. It is located on the right side of the display unit 35a of the device 35 (see FIG. 3).

[Upper production device]
Next, the upper effect device 400 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the upper effect device 400. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the light guide plate 470 constituting the movable display unit 450 of the upper effect device 400. FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view of the upper effect device 400. FIG. 25A is a perspective view of movable display unit 450 and drive mechanism 440 of upper rendering device 400. FIG. FIG. 25B is a rear view of the top effect device 400 with the fixed base 420 removed.

  As shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 22, the top effect device 400 is an upper fixing unit 410 fixed to the mounting recess 243 a of the upper decoration portion 243, and a movable that is vertically movable on the front surface of the upper fixing unit 410. And a display unit 450.

  As shown in FIGS. 22 to 24, the movable display unit 450 is provided in a mounting base 460 to which various members are mounted, a light guide plate 470 disposed in front of the mounting base 460, and in front of the light guide plate 470. A display 480 as a sub display device and a cover member 490 attached to the attachment base 460 so as to surround various members.

  The mounting base 460 is a flat plate-like member, and a wall portion 461 standing up front is formed on the upper and lower portions of the front surface of the mounting base 460. The pair of upper and lower wall portions 461 extend in the left-right direction, and are disposed so that the lower surface of the upper wall portion 461 and the upper surface of the lower wall portion 461 face each other. An engaging groove 461a with which the upper portion of the light guide plate 470 can be engaged is formed in the left and right direction on the lower surface of the upper wall portion 461, and the lower end of the light guide plate 470 is formed on the upper surface of the lower wall portion 461. An engaging groove 461a that can be engaged is formed in the left-right direction. The light guide plate 470 is supported by the upper and lower wall portions 461 by engaging with the engagement grooves 461a.

  The light guide plate 470 is a translucent plate member, and a pattern groove in the shape of a letter “Let's have a big chance!” Is formed inside the light guide plate 470. The light guide plate 470 is configured so that the pattern groove is lit and displayed when receiving light from the LEDs 462a of the LED substrate 462 disposed on the left and right sides of the light guide plate 470.

  The two LED boards 462 are arranged on the front surface of the mounting base 460 so as to be separated in the left-right direction. A pair of left and right substrate support portions 463 are formed on the attachment base 460, and the LED substrates 462 are attached to the left and right substrate support portions 463, respectively. The LED 462a of the LED board 462 supported by the left board support part 463 is arranged rightward so as to irradiate the left end surface of the light guide plate 470, and the LED 462a of the LED board 462 supported by the right board support part 463 is The light guide plate 470 is disposed leftward so as to irradiate light on the right end surface.

  Four LEDs 462a are arranged in a line on the left LED board 462, and three LEDs 462a are arranged in a line on the right LED board 462. Each LED 462a on the left LED board 462 and each LED 462a on the right LED board 462 are arranged so as to be vertically shifted so that the positions in the vertical direction are different. By adopting such an LED arrangement, the light guide plate 470 can be uniformly illuminated as a whole.

  As shown in FIGS. 22 and 24, the display 480 is a rectangular EL display, and is a transmissive display device in which a light guide plate 470 disposed behind can be visually recognized in a non-display state. The indicator 480 is attached in the cover member 490. By attaching the cover member 490 provided with the indicator 480 to the attachment base 460, the indicator 480 is positioned in front of the light guide plate 470.

  The cover member 490 is a translucent frame member, and a window portion 491 that allows the display 480 to be visually recognized is formed in the front surface of the cover member 490.

  The upper fixing unit 410 of the upper effect device 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22, 24 and 25A.

  As shown in FIGS. 22, 24, and 25 A, the upper fixing unit 410 includes a fixed base 420, a decorative cover member 430 attached to the front surface of the fixed base 420, and a space between the fixed base 420 and the decorative cover member 430. And a drive mechanism 440 that is disposed in the accommodation space and drives the movable display unit 450.

  The fixed base 420 is a flat plate-like member, and is fixed to the mounting recess 243 a of the upper decorative portion 243. An attachment portion 421 for attaching the drive motor 441 of the drive mechanism 440 is formed on the front surface of the fixed base 420.

  The decorative cover member 430 is a cover member that surrounds the drive mechanism 440 and is fixed to the fixed base 420. Character decorations “Land”, “Sea”, and “Sky” are provided on the front surface of the decoration cover member 430, and the three character decorations are arranged in a line in the left-right direction. These character decorations are hidden by the movable display unit 450 when the movable display unit 450 is located in front of the upper fixed unit 410 and are not visible, and can be viewed when the movable display unit 450 is lowered. It becomes a state.

  The drive mechanism 440 includes a drive motor 441 as a drive source, a disk-shaped cam link 442 that is fixed to the output shaft of the drive motor 441, and a slider 443 that is linked to the cam link 442.

  The slider 443 is a flat plate-like member that extends in the left-right direction. The slider 443 has a long hole 443a that penetrates the slider 443 in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction. The link pin 442a of the cam link 442 is slidably inserted into the long hole 443a of the slider 443. The link pin 442 a is fixed to the front surface of the cam link 442 at a position offset from the rotation center of the cam link 442.

  Connection pins 443b projecting forward are provided at the left and right ends of the slider 443, and a guide groove 431 is formed in the decorative cover member 430 to allow the connection pin 443b of the slider 443 to pass in the front-rear direction. The two guide grooves 431 extend slightly inclined with respect to the vertical direction, and are arranged in parallel while being separated in the horizontal direction. In a state where the slider 443 is disposed on the decorative cover member 430, the connecting pin 443 b of the slider 443 protrudes forward of the decorative cover member 430 through the guide groove 431. The mounting base 460 of the movable display unit 450 is fixed to the protruding portion of the connecting pin 443b. In this way, the movable display unit 450 is supported via the connecting pin 443b of the slider 443.

  The decorative cover member 430 between the two guide grooves 431 has a central guide groove 432 into which a guide pin 464 (see FIGS. 25A and 25B) protruding from the front surface of the slider 443 is slidably inserted. Provided. The central guide groove 432 is formed in parallel with the guide groove 431.

  As shown in FIG. 25B, when the effect by the upper effect device 400 is not executed, the drive motor 441 of the drive mechanism 440 is stopped and the link pin 442a of the cam link 442 is located at the uppermost position. . At this time, the movable display unit 450 supported by the connecting pin 443 b of the slider 443 is stopped at the front position (initial position) of the upper fixed unit 410. When the movable display unit 450 is stopped at the initial position, the character decoration of the decorative cover member 430 of the upper fixed unit 410 is invisible.

  When the game progresses in the gaming machine 1 and enters a predetermined gaming state, the drive motor 441 of the drive mechanism 440 is driven to rotate forward, and the link pin 442a of the cam link 442 turns clockwise in FIG. 25B. . When the link pin 442a turns and descends from the uppermost position while sliding in the long hole 443a of the slider 443, the slider 443 also descends according to the position of the link pin 442a. As a result, the movable display unit 450 supported by the connecting pin 443 b of the slider 443 is lowered with respect to the upper fixed unit 410. At this time, the guide pin 464 of the mounting base 460 of the movable display unit 450 moves downward along the central guide groove 432 of the decorative cover member 430.

  When the link pin 442a turns from the uppermost position to the lowermost position, the movable display unit 450 is lowered from the initial position to the lower limit position, so that the character decoration of the decorative cover member 430 of the upper fixed unit 410 can be visually recognized. Thereafter, when the drive motor 441 is driven forward so that the link pin 442a turns from the lowest position to the highest position, the movable display unit 450 is raised to the initial position.

  The upper effect device 400 includes a position detection sensor (not shown) that detects the position of the slider 443, and based on this position detection sensor, it is determined whether the movable display unit 450 is in the initial position or the lower limit position. Is done. In the upper effect device 400, it is also possible to execute a vibration effect that causes the movable display unit 450 to vibrate up and down by alternately repeating forward rotation and reverse rotation of the drive motor 441.

[Right production device]
Next, with reference to FIG. 21, FIG. 26-FIG.

  FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the right effect device 500. FIG. FIG. 27 is a vertical cross-sectional perspective view of the right part rendering device 500. FIG. FIG. 28A is a perspective view of the movable decorative unit 550 and the drive mechanism 540 of the right effect device 500. FIG. FIG. 28B is a back view of right portion rendering apparatus 500 with fixed base 520 removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 21 and 26, the right part rendering device 500 is slidable in the left-right direction with respect to the side fixing unit 510 fixed to the mounting recess 242 a of the right decorative part 242 and the side fixing unit 510. And a movable decorative unit 550 disposed on the surface.

  26 and 27, the movable decorative unit 550 includes a mounting base 560 disposed in front of the side fixing unit 510, a decorative member 570 fixed to the front surface of the mounting base 560, and a decorative member 570. And a pair of infrared sensors (human sensors) 590 attached to the lower part of the decorative member 570.

  The mounting base 560 is a flat member, and a decorative member 570 is mounted on the front surface of the mounting base 560.

  The decorative member 570 is a box-shaped member. An opening 571 penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the central portion of the decorative member 570, and the rotary cylinder 580 is disposed so as to be positioned in the opening 571. The upper end of the rotating cylinder 580 is formed as a closed end, and the lower end of the rotating cylinder 580 is formed as an open end.

  A motor accommodating portion 572 that accommodates a drive motor 551 that rotationally drives the rotary cylinder 580 is formed at the upper portion of the decorative member 570, and a sensor accommodating portion 573 that accommodates the infrared sensor 590 is formed at the lower portion of the decorative member 570. ing.

  In a state where the drive motor 551 is housed in the motor housing portion 572, the output shaft of the drive motor 551 is directed downward. The closed end (upper end) of the rotating cylinder 580 is fixed to the lower end of the output shaft of the drive motor 551.

  In addition, an LED substrate 552 to be inserted into the rotary cylinder 580 through the opening end of the rotary cylinder 580 is fixed to the opening 571 of the decorative member 570. A plurality of LEDs 552 a for causing the rotary cylinder 580 to emit light are provided on the surface of the LED substrate 552.

  The infrared sensor is a non-contact human sensor that detects that a part of the player's body has entered the detection range. The detection range of the infrared sensor 590 will be described later with reference to FIG. Two infrared sensors 590 are arranged adjacent to each other in the left-right direction in the sensor housing portion 573 of the decorative member 570.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the side fixing unit 510 includes a fixed base 520, a decorative cover member 530 attached to the front surface of the fixed base 520, and an accommodation space between the fixed base 520 and the decorative cover member 530. And a drive mechanism 540 that drives the movable decorative unit 550.

  The fixed base 520 is a flat plate-like member, and is fixed to the mounting recess 242a of the right decorative portion 242. An attachment portion 521 for attaching the drive motor 541 of the drive mechanism 540 is formed on the front surface of the fixed base 520.

  The decorative cover member 530 is a cover member that surrounds the drive mechanism 540 and is fixed to the fixed base 520. On the front surface of the decorative cover member 530, a character decoration of “Hold your hand up” is applied. When the movable decoration unit 550 is positioned in front of the side fixing unit 510, the character decoration is hidden by the movable decoration unit 550 and cannot be visually recognized, and the movable decoration unit 550 slides to the left. In some cases, it becomes visible.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 and 28A, the drive mechanism 540 includes a drive motor 541 as a drive source, a disk-shaped cam link 542 fixed to the output shaft of the drive motor 541, and a slider linked to the cam link 542. 543.

  The slider 543 is a flat plate-like member extending in the vertical direction. The slider 543 has a long hole 543a that penetrates the slider 543 in the front-rear direction and extends in the up-down direction. The link pin 542a of the cam link 542 is slidably inserted into the long hole 543a of the slider 543. The link pin 542a is fixed to the front surface of the cam link 542 at a position offset from the rotation center of the cam link 542.

  Guide pins 543b protruding forward are provided at both upper and lower ends of the slider 543, and a guide groove 531 is formed in the decorative cover member 530 so that the guide pins 543b of the slider 543 are slidably engaged. Yes. The two guide grooves 531 extend in the left-right direction and are horizontally arranged in a state of being separated in the up-down direction. The slider 543 slides in the left-right direction when the guide pin 543 b slides along the guide groove 531.

  Further, a pair of upper and lower connecting bosses 561 (see FIG. 28A) connected to the slider 543 are formed on the back surface of the mounting base 560 of the movable decorative unit 550, and the mounting base 560 is included via these connecting bosses 561. The movable decoration unit 550 is fixed to the slider 543. The decorative cover member 530 is formed with a guide groove 532 through which the connecting boss 561 of the mounting base 560 passes in the front-rear direction. The two guide grooves 532 extend in the left-right direction, and are horizontally disposed inside the two guide grooves 531 in a state of being separated in the up-down direction. The movable decorative unit 550 slides in the left-right direction as the connecting boss 561 slides along the guide groove 532.

  As shown in FIG. 27, when the effect by the right effect device 500 is not executed, the drive motor 541 of the drive mechanism 540 is stopped, and the link pin 542a of the cam link 542 is the right-most right position. Is located. At this time, the movable decorative unit 550 supported by the slider 543 is stopped at the front position (initial position) of the side fixing unit 510. When the movable decorative unit 550 is stopped at the initial position, the character decoration on the decorative cover member 530 of the side fixing unit 510 becomes invisible.

  As shown in FIG. 28B, when the game progresses in the gaming machine 1 and enters a predetermined gaming state, the drive motor 541 of the drive mechanism 540 is driven to rotate forward, and the link pin 542a of the cam link 542 is connected to the link pin 542a of FIG. In the clockwise direction. When the link pin 542a turns and moves from the right limit position to the left while sliding through the long hole 543a of the slider 543, the slider 543 also moves to the left according to the position of the link pin 542a. As a result, the connecting boss 561 connected to the slider 543 moves along the guide groove 532, and the movable decorative unit 550 slides to the left with respect to the side fixing unit 510.

  When the link pin 542a turns from the right limit position to the left limit position, the movable decoration unit 550 slides from the initial position to the left limit position on the left side, and the character decoration of the decoration cover member 530 of the side fixing unit 510 can be visually recognized. It becomes a state. Thereafter, when the drive motor 541 is driven in reverse so that the link pin 542a turns from the left limit position to the right limit position, the movable decorative unit 550 slides to the initial position.

  The right effect device 500 is configured to rotate the rotating cylinder 580 by the drive motor 551 when the movable decorative unit 550 is located at the left limit position and the infrared sensor 590 is in the detection state. At this time, a light emission effect using the LED 552a of the LED substrate 552 is also performed.

  Note that the right effect device 500 includes a position detection sensor (not shown) that detects the position of the slider 543, and based on this position detection sensor, whether the movable decoration unit 550 is in the initial position or the left limit position. Is determined. Moreover, in the right part production | presentation apparatus 500, the vibration effect which vibrates the movable decoration unit 550 to the left and right can also be performed by repeating forward rotation and reverse rotation of the drive motor 541 alternately.

[Wiring routing structure]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 29 to FIG. 33, a description will be given of the wiring routing structure of the electrical components (here, the general diagram start gate 36 and the second special variable winning device 42) disposed on the game board 32. As described above, the game board 32 according to the first embodiment of the present invention is a transparent member that can be seen through the back. For this reason, the rendering device unit 200 disposed in the decoration space between the game board 30 and the rear unit base member 210 (that is, the space composed of the upper accommodation space 214 and the lower accommodation space 215) It functions as a three-dimensional decorative member that is visually recognized by a person and produces a decorative effect. In addition, since the wiring of the electrical components arranged on the game board 30 and routed behind the game board 32 can be visually recognized by the player, a wiring process that does not disturb the decoration of the three-dimensional decoration member is desired.

  FIG. 29 is a perspective view of the upper decoration unit 240 according to the first embodiment of this invention. FIG. 30 is an upper left enlarged perspective view of the upper decoration unit 240 with the gaming board 30 according to the first embodiment of the present invention attached. FIG. 31 is an enlarged view of the periphery of the universal start gate (gate switch 603 corresponds to a specific electrical component) 36 in FIG. 30 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 32 is an enlarged view of the periphery of the big prize opening solenoid 28b and the upper count switch 606 (corresponding to a normal electric component) in FIG. 30 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 33 is a rear perspective view of the peripheral portion of the universal start gate 36 in FIG. 30 according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

  As shown in FIG. 29, the upper decoration unit 240 that decorates the left and right side portions and the upper peripheral edge of the main display device (variable display device) 35 in a front view in a substantially U shape includes a left decoration portion 241 and a right decoration portion. 242 and the upper decoration part 243. Note that FIG. 29 is the same as the diagram included in FIG. 21 described above, and the components already described are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

  Since the distribution device 90 (see FIG. 3) of the center case 34 is disposed above the right decoration portion 242 at a connection portion with the upper decoration portion 243, wiring of each sensor provided in the distribution device 90 is performed. A wiring opening 242b is provided on the back side of the upper decoration unit 240 for routing.

  A wiring opening 243 c for routing the wiring of the upper effect device 400 (see FIG. 8) to the back side of the upper decoration unit 240 is provided in the mounting recess 243 a of the upper decoration portion 243. Further, the upper decoration portion 243 is provided with an upper front decoration member 245 located behind the second special variable prize-winning device 42 (see FIG. 30). A wiring opening 245 a for routing the wiring of the second special variable winning device 42 to the back side of the upper decoration unit 240 is provided on the front surface of the upper front decoration member 245.

  Here, the wiring routing structure of the second special variable winning device 42 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 30 and 32, in the state where the game board 30 is attached, the second special variation winning device 42 provided in the game area 31 is arranged in front of the upper front decorative member 245. In the second special variable winning device 42, the turning ball 42a is operated by the big winning port solenoid 28b, so that the game ball can be won in the second big winning port. The second grand prize opening is provided with an upper count switch 606 for detecting a winning game ball. The game balls that have won the second grand prize opening are guided to the winning ball channel 44. Then, as shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the wiring W2 of the big prize opening solenoid 28b and the upper count switch 606 is three-dimensionally decorated such as the upper front decorative member 245 from the wiring opening 245a located behind the rotating portion 42a. The wire is led out of the decoration space from the wiring opening 212b on the back surface side of the unit base member 210 through a wiring lead-out path (not shown) formed inside the member. Thus, the upper front decorative member 245 functions as a shielding decorative portion that shields the wiring W2 from being exposed behind the game board 32 and has a decorative effect, and further connects the wiring W2 from the front wiring opening 245a to the inside. It also functions as a wiring lead-out portion for drawing in and pulling out to the back side.

  When the second special variation winning device 42 is arranged near the center of the game board 32 (the center of the upper decoration unit 240) in this way, the wiring W2 of the second special variation winning device 42 is connected to the rear three-dimensional decorative member. It is routed to the back side of the three-dimensional decoration member via a wiring lead-out path provided inside, and is led out of the decoration space. As a result, the wiring distance is short and efficient wiring processing can be performed as compared with the structure in which the wiring is routed to the end through the wiring W2 in front of the upper decoration unit 240, and the deterioration of the aesthetics and visibility behind the game board 32 is suppressed. can do. At this time, the wiring W2 is drawn into an upper front decoration member 245 provided to protrude from the upper decoration portion 243 of the upper decoration unit 240. In this way, the upper decoration unit 240 is provided so as to protrude in front of the upper decoration part 243 (second decoration part) of the base stored in the decoration space, and is close to or in contact with the back surface of the game board 32. (1st decoration part) is provided. Since the wiring opening 245a is provided in the upper front decorative member 245 closer to the game board 32 than the upper decoration portion 243, and the wiring W2 is drawn into the inside from the wiring opening 245a, the wiring W2 is exposed behind the gaming board 32. The amount can be reduced, and a decrease in aesthetic appearance behind the game board can be suppressed.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 29, 30 and 32, a dummy accommodating portion 243b is provided above the upper front decorative member 245 so as to appear as if the magnetic sensor 23 for detecting an illegal act is accommodated. The Such a dummy accommodating part 243b is provided in a place where a dishonest act does not occur or in a place where it reacts to a device having other magnetism (for example, the second special variable winning device 42). The player cannot determine the presence or absence of the magnetic sensor 23. By providing the dummy accommodating portion 243b as described above, it is possible to make the player think that a large number of magnetic sensors 23 are installed, and thus an effect of giving up the illegal act is obtained.

  As shown in FIG. 29, a front side decorative portion 246 is projected from the front surface of the left decorative portion 241. As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the side front decoration portion 246 is located behind the usual start gate 36 so that the wiring W1 of the gate switch 603 extending from the back of the game board 32 to the decoration space passes forward. It is arranged. Specifically, the wiring W1 of the gate switch 603 passes through the rear of the flange portion 36b of the gate member 36a and the front of the side front decorative portion 246 and is routed to the end thereof. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 33, the wiring W1 is led out of the decoration space from the wiring opening 212a formed in the side wall 212 of the unit base member 210 in the front-rear direction, and is wired along the wiring opening 212a. It is led out to the back side of the unit base member 210. The unit base member 210 also functions as a wiring lead-out section that routes the wiring W1 out of the decoration space through the wiring opening 212a.

  Here, the side front decorative portion 246 is arranged in a color similar to that of the wiring W1. Thereby, since the wiring W1 passing through the front of the side front decoration part 246 is not conspicuous, it is possible to further suppress the beauty of the back of the game board 32 and the visibility of the side front decoration part 246. The side front decorative portion 246 is provided with a striped pattern or a cut in the same direction as the wiring direction of the wiring W1 (here, the left-right direction), so that the same effect can be obtained whether or not the same color as the wiring W1. You may make it obtain.

  In this way, when the normal start gate 36 is disposed near the end of the game board 32 (the end of the decoration space), the wiring W1 of the general start gate 36 is placed in front of the rear upper decoration unit 240. It passes through to the end and passes through the wiring opening 212a provided on the side and is led out of the decoration space. At this time, since it is not necessary to form a wiring lead-out portion on the front surface of the upper decoration unit 240 (an area visible to the player through the game board 32), it is possible to prevent the decoration of the upper decoration unit 240 from being deteriorated. .

  In addition, a decorative plate (shielding plate) 34e (see FIG. 6) for shielding the special winning opening solenoid 28b is provided in front of the special winning opening solenoid 28b of the second special variation winning apparatus 42 described above. The decorative board 34e regulates that the big winning opening solenoid 28b is directly visible to the player, and can prevent the appearance around the second special variable winning device 42 from being damaged. Further, since the wiring of the big prize opening solenoid 28b passes through the back of the decoration board 34e and is led to the wiring opening 245a, the wiring of the big prize opening solenoid 28b is difficult to visually recognize by the decoration board 34e. Further, since the gate switch 603 of the usual start gate 36 is in a state where the front side is covered with the gate member 36a (see FIG. 31), the gate member 36a functions as a member that shields the gate switch 603. Thereby, the gate switch 603 is restricted from being directly visible to the player, and it is possible to prevent the beauty of the area around the normal start gate 36 from being damaged. Furthermore, since the wiring of the gate switch 603 passes behind the flange portion 36b provided in the gate member 36a, the wiring of the gate switch 603 is difficult to visually recognize by the flange portion 36b.

  As described above, in the first embodiment of the present invention, the wiring W1 of the general start gate 36 (second electrical component) near the end of the game area 31 (decoration space) is the upper decoration unit 240 (three-dimensional decoration member). Is drawn out of the decoration space by being routed along the wiring opening 212 a of the unit base member 210, while the second special variable winning device 42 ( The wiring W2 of the first electrical component is led out of the decoration space through the wiring opening 245a of the upper decoration unit 240 through the inside. Then, the wirings W1 and W2 led out of the decoration space (the back side of the unit base member 210) are connected to the game control device 600. As described above, since the wiring routing structure is applied according to the arrangement of the electrical components, efficient wiring processing is possible.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 to 31, the shape of the magnetic sensor housing portion 241 b near the universal start gate 36 is the same as that of the dummy housing portion 243 b. The magnetic sensor housing portion 241b actually houses the magnetic sensor 23 that detects fraud. Thus, by providing the magnetic sensor housing part 241b and the dummy housing part 243b that cannot be distinguished at a glance in the game area 31, and providing the magnetic sensor 23 at a place where the occurrence rate of fraudulent acts is high, Discovery and prevention can be done. In the first embodiment of the present invention, the magnetic sensor housing portion 241b and the dummy housing portion 243b are disposed in the left decorative portion 241 and the upper decorative portion 243 (that is, the upper decorative unit 240), respectively. You may arrange | position to the game board 32 side.

[Charging unit]
Next, with reference to FIG. 34 to FIG. 40, a description will be given of a static elimination unit 900 that releases static electricity charged on the transparent resin game board 32 to the frame (here, the glass frame 6) side. As described above, in the first embodiment of the present invention, the reinforcing sheet metal 6b (see FIG. 2) is provided on the back surface of the glass frame 6, and the static elimination unit 900 (see FIGS. 3 and 5) is located above the right side of the game board 30. Reference) is provided. Then, in a state in which the game board 30 is housed in the frame body (opening / closing frame 4) composed of the glass frame 6 and the front frame 5, the metal conductive member 901 provided in the static elimination unit 900 contacts the reinforcing sheet metal 6 b of the glass frame 6. To ground. The mechanism will be described below.

  FIG. 34 is a perspective view showing a mounting state of the static eliminator unit 900 provided in the game board 30 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the static elimination unit 900 according to the first embodiment of this invention. FIG. 36 is a rear perspective view of the static elimination unit 900 according to the first embodiment of this invention. FIG. 37 is a longitudinal sectional view showing the static elimination unit 900 in FIG. 34 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 38 and 39 are vertical cross-sectional views showing an operation mode of the static elimination unit 900 when housed in the frame (opening / closing frame 4) of the first embodiment of the present invention.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 to 39, a mounting portion 902 for attaching the static elimination unit 900 is formed above the right side of the game board 30 by a partition member 32 b on the front surface of the game board 32. The static eliminator unit 900 has a screw hole 903 that opens to the front surface, and after being attached to the attachment portion 902, the screw 904 is passed through the screw hole 903 and fixed to the game board 32. Cutouts 32f and 213a are formed in the game board 32 and the spacer member 213 of the unit base member 210 positioned behind the mounting portion 902, respectively, below the fastening position by the screw 904. These notches 32f and 213a are formed so that a protruding pressing portion 5d (see FIG. 38) provided on the front frame 5 can be inserted when the game board 30 is stored in the front frame 5.

  Here, the static eliminator unit 900 includes a base member 907 having an accommodation space forming portion 905 and a rail conductive portion 906, a conductive member 901 that can contact the reinforcing sheet metal 6b of the glass frame 6, and a conductive member that can contact the guide rail 32a. 908. The guide rail 32a may be directly attached to the game board 32, or may be attached to the partition member 32b. In short, the method of attaching to the game board 32 can be arbitrarily set as long as the charged static electricity can be collected on the launched game ball or game board.

  The base member 907 has a box shape with an open rear surface, and the accommodating space forming portion 905 forms an accommodating space 905a capable of accommodating the conductive member 901 from the opened rear surface. Further, the rail conduction portion 906 is provided on the side surface of the accommodation space forming portion 905 so as to protrude so as to come into contact with the guide rail 32 a that partitions the game area 31. Here, an L-shaped conducting member 908 is attached to the rear surface of the rail conducting portion 906. An insertion part 906a into which the conduction member 908 and the guide rail 32a can be inserted is provided at the end of the rail conduction part 906, and the contact part of the conduction member 908 inserted into the insertion part 906a as shown in FIG. Static electricity charged on the game board 30 is caused to flow to the conduction member 908 of the static elimination unit 900 through the guide rail 32a by the contact between the guide rail 908a and the guide rail 32a. The other end of the conductive member 908 is provided with a fixed portion 908b fixed to the game board 32 together with the base member 907 and the conductive member 901 by a screw 904. The contact portion 908a extends from the guide rail 32a. The static electricity that has flowed to the conductive member 908 via the first member is caused to flow to the conductive member 901 via the fixed portion 908b.

  The upper end portion of the conductive member 901 is in contact with the fixed portion 908b of the conducting member 908 on the front surface, and is in contact with the game board 32 on the rear surface. As described above, the game board 32 is attached by the screw 904 together with the base member 907 and the conducting member 908. A fixed portion 901a is provided to be fixed to the head. Further, a press receiving portion 901b is provided below the fixed portion 901a. As shown in FIG. 37, in a state where the game board 30 is not attached to the front frame 5, the press receiving portion 901 b protrudes and faces the cutout portion 32 f of the game board 32. As shown in FIG. 38, when the game board 30 is attached to the front frame 5, the press receiving portion 901b is pushed forward by the protruding pressing portion 5d of the front frame 5 inserted through the notch 32f. A contact portion 901d is provided below the pressure receiving portion 901b via a flat plate portion 901c inclined forward and downward. At this time, the flat plate portion 901c is disposed along the upper surface of the support portion 907a provided on the rear surface of the base member 907.

  As shown in FIG. 37, the contact portion 901d of the conductive member 901 maintains a state (embedded state) that is accommodated in the accommodation space 905a of the base member 907 when the game board 30 is not attached to the front frame 5. On the other hand, in the state where the game board 30 is attached to the front frame 5 as shown in FIG. 38, the conductive member 901 comes into contact with the forward pushing of the press receiving portion 901b by the protruding pressing portion 5d of the front frame 5. The part 901d is also pushed forward. When the pressure receiving portion 901b is completely pushed out from the cutout portion 32f, the contact portion 901d is exposed to the outside (the game board 30 of the game board 30) from the exposed opening 907b provided to open to the front surface of the base member 907 (the accommodation space forming portion 905). It changes to a protruding state protruding outward.

  Thus, the conductive member 901 functions as a leaf spring that is elastically deformed when the pressure receiving portion 901b receives a forward force. As shown in FIG. 39, when the game board 30 is attached to the front frame 5 and the glass frame 6 is closed in a state where the contact portion 901d is converted from the buried state to the protruding state, the contact portion 901d is attached to the back surface of the glass frame 6. The conducting portion 6c of the reinforcing sheet metal 6b provided comes into contact. As a result, the conductive member 901 can remove the static electricity from the game board 30 by letting it escape to the glass frame 6 through the conductive portion 6c.

  At this time, a stopper portion 901e that restricts the forward protrusion of the contact portion 901d is provided below the contact portion 901d and at the lower end of the conductive member 901, and the stopper portion 901e serves as the exposure opening 907b of the base member 907. The protruding state of the contact portion 901d is stabilized by being locked to the operation restricting portion 907c that forms the lower frame.

  In the static eliminator unit 900 according to the first embodiment of the present invention, in the state where the game board 30 is not accommodated in the front frame 5, that is, in the situation where the game board 30 is transported or detached, the conductive member 901 is the base member 907 ( Since the buried state not exposed from the accommodation space 905a) is maintained, the conductive member 901 can prevent the worker from being injured. On the other hand, in a state where the game board 30 is housed in the front frame 5, the conductive member 901 is converted from a buried state to a protruding state protruding outside the base member 907 by the protruding pressing portion 5 d of the front frame 5. When the glass frame 6 is closed when the conductive member 901 is in the protruding state, the conductive portion 6c of the reinforcing sheet metal 6b functions as a ground member that contacts the contact portion 901d and removes static electricity charged in the game board 30.

  As described above, the static eliminator unit 900 of the present invention can surely remove the static electricity charged on the resin game board 32 by letting it escape to the frame side (here, the glass frame 6). Moreover, since the attitude | position state of the electrically-conductive member 901 is converted according to the accommodation condition of the game board 30, a safe conveyance work and attachment / detachment work can be provided. Further, the state conversion operation of the conductive member 901 and the contact operation with the ground member are completed with the operation of storing the game board 30 in the storage frame body composed of the front frame 5 and the glass frame 6, so no special static elimination operation is required. It is. And the efficient static elimination can be provided, without the accommodation work efficiency of the game board 30 falling.

  A guide rail 32 a provided on the game board 32 and defining the game area 31 functions as a charging member that collects static electricity charged on the game board 32, and a static elimination unit 900 provided at the end of the guide rail 32 a and the game board 30. The conductive member 901 is electrically connected through the conductive member 908. By providing a charging member that collects static electricity on the game board 32 that is easily charged, the current collection efficiency is improved, and the static electricity charged on the game board 32 can be efficiently removed.

  Note that the charging member of the game board 30 that contacts the contact portion 908a of the conducting member 908 is not limited to the guide rail 32a. As long as it is provided on the game board 30 and is a highly conductive member, a decorative plated part may be used. In order for the decoration member attached to the game board 32 to face the game area 31 to function as a charging member, it is only necessary to attach a metal film to the decoration member, so that the beauty of the game area 31 (behind the game board 32) can be improved. A charging member facing the game area 31 can be disposed without damaging the game area 31.

  Further, the base member 907 of the static elimination unit 900 is fixed to the game board 32 with screws 904 while being sandwiched between the partition member 32 b provided in front of the game board 32 and the game board 32. As a result, the base member 907 that supports the conductive member 901 is firmly fixed to the game board 32 and stabilized.

  Here, a highly conductive screw 904 is used as a fastening member for fastening the static elimination unit 900 to the game board 32. At this time, not only the base member 907 but also the conductive member 901 are fixed to the game board 32 together. Therefore, the static electricity charged on the game board 32 is guided to the conductive member 901 through the fastening member, so that the static elimination efficiency is improved.

  In the first embodiment of the present invention, when the glass frame 6 is closed, the conductive member 901 of the static elimination unit 900 is grounded to the outer frame side (glass frame 6) of the frame (opening / closing frame 4). However, it may be configured to be grounded to the inner frame side (front frame 5).

(Modification)
FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating a static elimination unit according to a modification of the first embodiment of this invention. FIG. 40A is a perspective view, and FIG. 40B is a vertical cross-sectional view in a state attached to a frame.

  In the modification, as shown in FIGS. 40A and 40B, a protective wall 907d is projected forward along the left and right frames of the exposed opening 907b of the base member 907. The protective wall 907d is provided so as to be able to cover the contact portion 901d from the left and right sides when the contact portion 901d of the conductive member 901 is in a protruding state. At this time, the conducting portion 6c of the reinforcing sheet metal 6b of the glass frame 6 is provided with the protective wall 907d. In contact with the contact portion 901d.

  Thereby, the side edge of the contact part 901d of the conductive member 901 which is a thin plate can be protected from damage and deformation.

  The structure of the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment has been described above. Next, control of the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. First, game specifications in the present embodiment will be described.

[Game machine specifications]
FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating the specifications of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of this invention. (A) is the specification of the variable display game, (B) is the percentage of occurrence of each jackpot state (special game state) when the special figure variable display game has a special result, (C) is the lottery gate (variation part, No. 1) The round distribution table 1 including the selection probability of the number of rounds in the big hit state when the game ball passes through the 1-pass gate portion 34g) is a game ball in the fixed gate (fixed portion, second pass gate portion 34h). The round distribution table 2 including the number of rounds in the big hit state when the is passed is shown.

  Referring to (A), in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the jackpot probability is set to 1/300 in the low probability state, and the jackpot probability is set to 1/50 in the high probability state (probability variation state).

  Further, when a big hit occurs in the special figure variation display game, the game shifts to a probability variation state with a probability of 65/100. Specifically, as shown in (B), three types of first special result probability big hit, second special result normal big hit, and second special result probability big hit are generated, 5/100, 35/100, Selected with a probability of 60/100.

  The number of rounds in the big hit state can be selected from 5 rounds, 10 rounds, 15 rounds, and 16 rounds. In the first special outcome probability big hit, 16 rounds are always selected. On the other hand, in the case of the second special result normal big hit and the second special result probable big hit, either 5 rounds, 10 rounds or 15 rounds are selected.

  Specifically, as described above, when the game ball passes through the lottery gate of the distribution device 90, as shown in (C), 5 or 15 rounds are selected with a probability of 50/100. . On the other hand, when a game ball passes through the fixed gate, 10 rounds are always selected as shown in (D).

  Finally, the general map change display game will be described. In this embodiment, when the power transmission support state (electric power support state, short-time state or certain change state) is not (non-power support state), the win probability of the general-purpose fluctuation display game is set to 0/128. It is set not to win.

  On the other hand, in the case of the ordinary power support state, the winning probability of the usual map fluctuation display game is set to 127/128, which is set to be almost surely won. When a win-win game is selected, the ordinary electric accessory is released for 1.5 seconds, and this opening is repeated three times. Also, a plurality of opening patterns may be defined, and the ordinary electric accessory may be opened in any one of the opening patterns by lottery.

  Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation display game is one second regardless of whether or not the normal power support state is set. When a value greater than 0 is set for the winning probability of the normal map variation display game in the non-electric support state and the variation time is set to be longer, it takes time until the normal variation display game ends. , There is a risk that it will not be possible to shift to the ordinary power support state immediately after the special gaming state ends. By setting the win probability of the normal map variable display game to 0 and making the variable time constant, it is possible to shift to the general power support state immediately after the special game state ends.

  It should be noted that even in the non-electric support state, a value greater than 0 may be set for the winning probability of the normal fluctuation display game. Furthermore, a plurality of release patterns may be set. For example, in addition to the normal normal power short circuit open, a normal power long open that opens the ordinary electric utility for a relatively long time with a predetermined probability may be included. A special effect may be executed during the opening of the long-term service.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, two start winning holes are provided. However, regardless of which start winning hole is won, the first special result probability big hit, the second special result normal big hit, and the second special win For example, when a game ball wins the second starting winning prize opening, the probability of being assigned to the first special result promising winning jack is increased. You may set so that it may become more advantageous when a ball wins.

  Subsequently, state transition in the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 42 is a diagram illustrating state transition in the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, in a normal state, when a game ball wins a start winning opening, a variable display game is started. When the variable display game is out of play, the normal state is restored.

  In the case where the result of the variable display game is the first special result, as described with reference to FIG. At this time, the second special variable winning device 42 disposed on the upper portion of the center case 34 is opened.

  On the other hand, when the result of the variable display game is the second special result, the player launches a game ball toward the sorting device 90, and draws a lottery gate (first passing gate portion 34g) or a fixed gate (first gate). The game ball is passed through the 2-pass gate part 34h).

  As described above, when the player selects the lottery gate (first passing gate portion 34g) and passes the game ball, 5 or 15 rounds are selected in the lottery. On the other hand, when the fixed gate (second passing gate portion 34h) is selected, 10 rounds are always selected.

  In this embodiment, the probability that 5 rounds are selected and the probability that 15 rounds are selected are set to 50/100, respectively, but are selected when the lottery gate (the first passing gate portion 34g) is selected. If the expected number of rounds to be set is set to 10 rounds, another round number may be set. For example, 4 rounds and 16 rounds may be selected with a probability of 50/100, or 5 rounds, 10 rounds, and 15 rounds may be selected with equal probability.

  Therefore, the player may select a fixed gate so that 10 rounds of winning balls can be obtained without fail, or may select a lottery gate capable of acquiring more winning balls, depending on preference. can do.

  In addition, when the result of the variable display game is the second special result, when the special game state is started, an attacker-type first special variable prize winning device 41 arranged at the lower right of the game board 30 is displayed. Only the selected number of rounds are released.

[Game control device / effect control device]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44, the game control device 600 and the effect control device 700 provided in the gaming machine 1 will be described.

  FIG. 43 is a block configuration diagram showing a control system centering on the game control device 600 of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 44 is a block configuration diagram showing a control system centering on the effect control device 700 of the gaming machine 1.

  A game control device 600 shown in FIG. 43 is a main control device (main board) that comprehensively controls games in the gaming machine 1. A power supply device 800, a payout control device 640, and an effect control device 700 are connected to the game control device 600. The game control device 600 transmits a control signal (command) to the payout control device 640 and the effect control device 700 to instruct execution of various processes. Furthermore, the game control device 600 is connected to various switches, solenoids to be controlled, and the like.

  The game control device 600 includes a CPU unit 610 that performs various arithmetic processes, an input unit 620 that receives input of various signals, and an output unit 630 that outputs various signals and control signals. The CPU unit 610, the input unit 620, and the output unit 630 are connected to each other by a data bus 680.

  The input unit 620 receives signals output from various switches provided on the game board 30 and the like and signals output from the payout control device 640. The input unit 620 includes a proximity interface (I / F) 621 (621a, 621b) and input ports 622 (622a, 622b), 623.

  The input ports 622 and 623 receive a signal input via the proximity I / F 621 or directly receive a signal input from the outside. Information input to the input ports 622 and 623 is provided to the CPU unit 610 and the like via the data bus 680.

  The proximity I / F 621 is an interface that receives signals output from various switches, converts the input signals, and outputs the converted signals to the input port 622. A first start port switch 601, a second start port switch 602, a gate switch 603, winning port switches 604a to 604n, and lower count switches 605a to 605m are connected to the proximity I / F 621a. In addition, an upper count switch 606, a first passage detection sensor 607a, and a second passage detection sensor 607b are connected to the proximity I / F 621b.

  The first start port switch 601 is a switch that detects that a game ball has won the first start winning port 37. The second start port switch 602 is a switch that detects that a game ball has won the second start winning port 38. The gate switch 603 is a switch that detects that the game ball has passed the usual start gate 36. The winning award opening switches 604a to 604n are switches for detecting that the game ball has won the general winning opening 40.

  The lower count switches 605a to 605m and the upper count switch 606 are switches that detect that a game ball has won a big winning opening. When a winning game ball is detected by the lower count switches 605a to 605m and the upper count switch 606, the number of winning game balls is counted, and the counted number of gaming balls is stored in a memory provided in the game control device 600. Remembered.

  The first passage detection sensor 607a detects that the game ball has passed through the first passage gate portion 34g provided in the sorting device 90. Similarly, the second passage detection sensor 607b detects that a game ball has passed through the second passage gate portion 34h.

  The proximity I / F 621 receives a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11 V and a low level of 7 V supplied from various switches, and converts it to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. Since the proximity I / F 621 is normally within a predetermined range (7V-11V), the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected. It is possible to detect an abnormal state such as a floating state and output an abnormality detection signal.

  In addition, since the output value (ON / OFF) of the signal input to the proximity I / F 621 is switched by attaching / detaching the connector of the switch connected to the proximity I / F 621, the proximity I / F 621 is not connected to the switch. Even so, the output is kept constant.

  The reason for providing two proximity I / Fs, the proximity I / F 621a and the proximity I / F 621b, is that the number of input terminals of the proximity I / F 621a is limited. The proximity I / F 621b may be smaller than the proximity I / F 621a depending on the number of input terminals that are insufficient, so that the cost may be reduced. Note that the proximity I / F 621b may not be provided by using the proximity I / F 621a having a necessary number of input terminals.

  Of the output of the proximity I / F 621, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 24 and the abnormality detection signals 1 and 2 output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the input port 622a. Further, the detection signal of the fraud detection magnetic sensor 23 provided on the front frame 5 of the gaming machine 1 or the like is also input to the input port 622a.

  The magnetic sensor 23 detects a magnetic force in order to detect an illegal act of manipulating the trajectory of the launched game ball with a magnet. The radio wave sensor 24 detects a radio wave irradiated toward the gaming machine 1 in order to detect an illegal act that causes the prize opening switch 604 or the like to malfunction. Note that a vibration sensor that detects vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and the detection signal may be input to the input port 622a.

  Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 621, the output to the input port 622b is supplied from the game control device 600 to a test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 650. Further, the detection signals of the first start port switch 601 and the second start port switch 602 among the outputs of the proximity I / F 621 are input to the gaming microcomputer 611 via the inverting circuit 612 in addition to the input port 622b. It is configured. The inversion circuit 612 is provided because the signal input terminal of the gaming microcomputer 611 assumes that a signal from a micro switch or the like is input, and detects negative logic, that is, low level (0 V) as an effective level. Because it is designed to do.

  Therefore, when using a micro switch as the first start port switch 601 and the second start port switch 602, it is possible to directly input the detection signal to the gaming microcomputer 611 without providing the inverting circuit 612. . That is, when it is desired to directly input negative logic signals from the first start port switch 601 and the second start port switch 602 to the gaming microcomputer 611, the proximity switch cannot be used. As described above, the proximity I / F 621 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 621 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 800. It has become.

  A signal from the magnetic sensor 23 is directly input to the input port 622a, and signals from the front frame opening detection switch (SW) 25 and the glass frame opening detection switch (SW) 26 are directly input to the input port 623. The input port 623 also receives a status signal indicating a payout abnormality from the payout control device 640.

  The front frame opening detection SW 25 detects that the front frame 5 is opened. The front frame opening detection SW 25 is set to ON when the front frame 5 is released from the main body frame 2, and is set to OFF when the front frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 2.

  The glass frame open detection SW 26 detects that the glass frame 6 has been opened. The glass frame open detection SW 26 is set to ON when the glass frame 6 is released from the front frame 5, and is set to OFF when the glass frame 6 is closed to the front frame 5.

  The data held in the input port 622b can be read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 611 decoding the address assigned to the input port 622b. The same applies to the input port 622a and the input port 623 described later.

  The CPU unit 610 of the game control device 600 includes a game microcomputer 611, an inversion circuit 612, and a crystal oscillator 613.

  The gaming microcomputer 611 includes a CPU 611a, a ROM 611b, and a RAM 611c, and executes various processes such as a big hit lottery by executing a program stored in the ROM 611b based on a signal input via the input unit 620. . Through the output unit 630, the gaming microcomputer 611 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 1 display) 51, a second special figure fluctuation display part (special figure 2 display) 52, and a general figure display part ( Special figure display) 53, special figure 1 hold display part 54, special figure 2 hold display part 55, universal figure hold display part 56, high probability display part, short time state display part, round number display part 59 are provided. A control signal is transmitted to the collective display device 50 composed of a figure / general LED board, the general electric solenoid 27, the big prize opening solenoid 28, the effect control device 700, and the payout control device 640 to control the gaming machine 1. To control. The gaming microcomputer 611 selects a port for inputting or outputting a signal by chip selection.

  The ROM 611b is a non-volatile storage medium and stores programs, data, and the like for game control.

  The RAM 611c is a volatile storage medium, and is used as a work area for temporarily storing information (for example, random number values) necessary for game control.

  The inversion circuit 612 inverts the logical value of the signal (the signal from the first start port switch 601 and the second start port switch 602) input via the proximity I / F 621 and outputs the inverted value to the gaming microcomputer 611.

  The crystal oscillator 613 is configured as an operating clock source of a hard random number for performing a timer interrupt, a system clock signal, a big hit lottery, and the like.

  The output unit 630 of the game control device 600 includes ports 631a to 631e, buffers 632a and 632b, drivers 633a to 633d, and a photocoupler 634.

  The ports 631a to 631e receive signals input via the data bus 680.

  The buffers 632a and 632b temporarily hold signals input via the data bus 680 and the ports 631a and 631b.

  The drivers 633a to 633d generate various drive signals from the signals input via the ports 631c to 631e and output them to each device.

  The photocoupler 634 is configured to be connectable to an external inspection device 670, and removes noise from various signals that are input and output to shape the waveforms of the various signals. Information is transmitted and received between the photocoupler 634 and the inspection device 670 by serial communication.

  Information output from the CPU unit 610 by parallel communication is transmitted to the payout control device 640 via the port 631a. Specifically, a 4-bit data signal and a control signal (data strobe signal) indicating the validity / invalidity of the data are output. Since there is no need to secure one-way communication for the payout control device 640, a control signal is directly transmitted from the port 631a to the payout control board of the payout control device 640.

  Further, the payout control device 640 outputs a firing permission signal to the firing control device. The launch control device can launch a game ball into the game area 31 only when a launch permission signal is input.

  The payout control device 640 discharges the winning ball from the payout unit (not shown) based on the prize ball command signal from the game control device 600, or the payout unit based on the lending request signal from the card unit (not shown). Or renting a ball. As described above, the payout control device 640 outputs a payout abnormality status signal, a shot ball shortage switch signal, and an overflow switch signal to the game control device 600 when a failure such as a ball breakage or a failure occurs.

  The payout abnormality status signal is a signal output when the game ball is not paid out normally. The payout chute ball switch signal is a signal that is output when there is a shortage of game balls before payout. The overflow switch signal is a signal output when a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 14 (see FIG. 1). Data is transmitted from the game control device 600 to the effect control device 700 by serial communication.

  Subcommands are input to the effect control device 700 via the buffer 632a of the output unit 630. By having the buffer 632a, it becomes possible to prevent a signal from being input to the game control device 600 from the side of the effect control device 700, and unidirectional communication can be secured. The subcommands transmitted to the effect control device 700 include effect control command signals such as a change start command, a customer waiting demo command, a fanfare command, a probability information command, and an error designation command.

  A signal output from the CPU unit 610 is input to the special winning opening solenoid 28 and the general power solenoid 27 via the port 631b and the driver 633a. The big prize opening solenoid 28a rotates the opening / closing door 41a (see FIG. 3) of the first special variable prize winning device 41, and the big prize opening solenoid 28b is a turning portion 42a (see FIG. 3) of the second special variable prize winning device 42. And the ordinary solenoid 27 converts the movable member 38a to the open state so that the game ball can be won into the second start winning opening 38.

  The collective display device 50 includes a special figure / common figure LED substrate and a case member for accommodating the special figure / general figure LED substrate. The anode terminal of the LEDs of the collective display device 50 is connected to the driver 633c via a segment line, and the driver 633c and the port 631c are connected. The cathode terminal of the LEDs of the collective display device 50 is connected to the driver 633b via a digit line, and the driver 633b and the port 631b are connected. The on / off drive signal from the driver 633c is input to the anode terminal of the LEDs of the collective display device 50, and the on / off drive signal is output from the cathode terminal of the LED of the collective display device 50 to the driver 633b.

  The external information terminal 660 is provided with a photo relay, and is a terminal for outputting game data such as a start signal indicating the start of a variable display game and a special prize signal indicating the occurrence of a big hit gaming state to the information collecting terminal device. The game data is output to the external information terminal 660 via the port 631e and the driver 633d.

  The game control device 600 is configured to be connectable to an external test test device via a relay board 650. The test firing test apparatus is an apparatus for performing a type test of the gaming machine 1 in a predetermined engine. The test firing test apparatus includes signals from the first start port switch 601, the second start port switch 602, the gate switch 603, the winning port switches 604a to 604n, the lower count switches 605a to 605m, and the upper count switch 606. Signals necessary for the test fire test, such as signals output to the mouth solenoid 28 and the ordinary electric solenoid 27, are input.

  The game control device 600 is connected to the power supply device 800 via a Schmitt circuit 624 provided in the input unit 620. The Schmitt circuit 624 is a circuit that removes fluctuation (noise) of the input signal in order to prevent the operation of the gaming machine 1 from becoming unstable when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. The Schmitt circuit 624 receives a power failure monitoring signal, an initialization switch signal, and a reset signal from the power supply device 800.

  The power supply device 800 includes a normal power supply unit including an AC-DC converter that generates a DC32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power supply, and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V and DC5V from the DC32V voltage. 810, a backup power supply unit 820 that supplies a power supply voltage to the RAM 611c in the gaming microcomputer 611 at the time of a power failure, a power failure monitoring circuit and an initialization switch, and notifies the game control device 600 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure And a control signal generation unit 830 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal, an initialization switch signal, and a reset signal.

  The backup power supply unit 820 is a power supply for backing up game data stored in the RAM 611c of the game microcomputer 611. After the power failure is restored, the game control device 600 restores the gaming state before the power failure based on the game data held in the RAM 611c.

  The control signal generator 830 monitors the input voltage (guaranteed DC 32V) of the switching regulator that generates DC 12V and DC 5V. When the detected voltage is DC 17.2 V to DC 20.0 V, it is determined that there is a power failure, and a power failure monitoring signal is output from the control signal generation unit 830. The power failure monitoring signal is input to the input port 623 of the input unit 620 via the Schmitt circuit 624. After the power failure monitoring signal is output, the power failure monitoring circuit outputs a reset signal. The reset signal is input to each port 631a to 631e of the gaming microcomputer 611 and the output unit 630 via the Schmitt circuit 624. When the game control device 600 receives the power failure monitoring signal, the game control device 600 performs a predetermined power failure process, and stops the operation of the CPU unit 610 after receiving the reset signal.

  The control signal generation unit 830 includes an initialization switch (not shown), and an initialization switch signal is output from the control signal generation unit 830 when the initialization switch is in an ON state when the power is turned on. The initialization switch signal is input to the input port 623 of the input unit 620 via the Schmitt circuit 624. The initialization switch signal is a signal for forcibly initializing information stored in the RAM 611c of the gaming microcomputer 611 and the RAM of the payout control device 640.

  As described above, the power failure monitoring signal and the initialization switch signal are once input to the input port 623, taken into the game microcomputer 611 via the data bus 680, and are handled as signals equivalent to signals from various switches. . This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 611 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt circuit 624 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 611 and supplied to each port of the output unit 630 as described above. Further, the reset signal RST is output directly to the relay board 650 without going through the output unit 630, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 650 for output to the test board. Is configured to do. Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 650. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 622 and 623 of the input unit 620. Data set to each port of the output unit 630 by the gaming microcomputer 611 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system, but each data of the input unit 620 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 611 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 611 is reset.

  The effect control device 700 shown in FIG. 44 controls the video under the control of the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 710 composed of an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 710 in the same manner as the game microcomputer 611 of the game control device 600. A video control processor (2ndCPU) 720 that performs the above and a VDP (Video Display Processor) that performs image processing for video display on the variable display device 35 (see FIG. 2) according to commands and data from the video control microcomputer 720 730, and a sound source LSI 705 for reproducing various melody and sound effects from the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b.

  PROM (Programmable Read Only Memory) 702 and 703 storing programs executed by the CPUs are connected to the main control microcomputer 710 and the video control microcomputer 720, respectively.

  An image ROM 704 in which character images and video data are stored is connected to the VDP 730.

  The sound source LSI 705 is connected to an audio ROM 706 that stores audio data and the like.

  The main control microcomputer 710 analyzes the command transmitted from the game microcomputer 611 of the game control device 600, instructs the video control microcomputer 720 about the contents of the output video, and instructs the sound source LSI 705 about the contents of the reproduced sound. Or The main control microcomputer 710 also executes processing such as LED lighting control, various motor drive control, and production time management based on a control command from the game control device 600.

  RAMs 711 and 721 that provide work areas for the main control microcomputer 710 and the video control microcomputer 720 are provided in the respective chips. The RAMs 711 and 721 that provide the work area may be provided outside the chip.

  Data transmission / reception is performed between the main control microcomputer 710 and the video control microcomputer 720 and between the main control microcomputer 710 and the tone generator LSI 705 in a serial manner. In contrast, the main control microcomputer 710 and the VDP 730 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in the parallel system, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the serial system.

  The VDP 730 includes a VRAM (video RAM) 731 used for expanding and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 704, a scaler 732 for enlarging and reducing images, and an LVDS. A signal conversion circuit 733 for generating a video signal to be transmitted to the fluctuation display device 35 by the (small amplitude signal transmission) method is provided.

  A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC is output from the VDP 730 to the main control microcomputer 710 in order to synchronize the image of the variation display device 35 and the lighting of LEDs and the like provided on the front frame 5 and the game board 30. Also, the VDP 730 notifies the video control microcomputer 720 that it is waiting to receive commands and data from the interrupt signals INT0 to n and the video control microcomputer 720 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM 731. A wait signal WAIT is output.

  From the video control microcomputer 720 to the main control microcomputer 710, a synchronization signal SYNC for notifying that the video control microcomputer 720 is operating normally and giving command transmission timing is output.

  Between the main control microcomputer 710 and the tone generator LSI 705, an interrogation signal CTS and a response signal RTS are exchanged in order to transmit and receive commands and data by the handshake method.

  Note that the video control microcomputer 720 uses a CPU capable of performing higher-speed processing than the main control microcomputer 710. By providing a video control microcomputer 720 separately from the main control microcomputer 710 and sharing the processing, it is possible to display a fast moving image on a large screen, which is difficult to achieve with the main control microcomputer 710 alone, on the variable display device 35. In addition to this, an increase in cost can be suppressed as compared with the case where two CPUs having processing capabilities equivalent to those of the video control microcomputer 720 are used.

  The effect control device 700 includes an interface chip (command I / F) 701 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 600. The effect control device 700 receives the change start command, the customer waiting demo command, the fanfare command, the probability information command, the error designation command, and the like transmitted from the game control device 600 as the effect control command signal via the command I / F 701. To do. Since the game microcomputer 611 of the game control device 600 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 710 of the effect control device 700 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 701 is provided with a signal level conversion function. Yes.

  The effect control device 700 includes a panel decoration LED control circuit 741 that controls a panel decoration device 760 including LEDs and the like provided on the center case 34 and the game board 30, and a frame decoration device 21 that includes LEDs and the like provided on the front frame 5 and the like. Frame decoration LED control circuit 742 for controlling the display, board effect motor / SOL for controlling the board effect device 770 including the electric accessory and the decoration member 7 etc. that enhance the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the variable display device 35 Solenoid) control circuit 743, and a frame effect motor control circuit 744 for driving and controlling the frame effect device 22 including an illumination drive motor for the movable illumination 9 and the like are provided. These control circuits (741 to 744) are connected to a main control microcomputer 710 via an address / data bus 740.

  Further, the effect control device 700 includes an effect button SW (switch) 751 for detecting that the effect button 17 or the selection button 29 (see FIG. 1) is operated, and an effect motor for detecting that various drive motors are driven. SW (switch) 752a to 752n and switch (SW) input circuit 750 for detecting the on / off state of human sensor (infrared sensor) 590 and transmitting a detection signal to main control microcomputer 710 are provided. In addition, amplifier circuits 707 and 708 including audio power amplifiers for driving the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b are provided.

  The normal power supply unit 810 of the power supply device 800 is configured to be able to generate a plurality of types of voltages in order to supply a predetermined level of DC voltage to the effect control device 700 and the electronic components controlled by the effect control device 700. ing. Specifically, in addition to DC 32V for driving the drive motor and solenoid, DC 12V for driving the variable display device 35 including a liquid crystal panel, DC 5V serving as the power supply voltage of the command I / F 701, the upper speaker 10a and It is possible to generate DC 18V for driving the lower speaker 10b and NDC 24V used as a reference for these DC voltages or for turning on the power monitor lamp.

  The reset signal RST generated by the control signal generation unit 830 of the power supply device 800 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 710, the video control microcomputer 720, the VDP 730, the tone generator LSI 705, and various control circuits (741 to 744, 707, 708). These are reset. The power supply device 800 has a function of generating and supplying a reset signal for the VDP 730 using a general-purpose port included in the video control microcomputer 720. Thereby, the cooperation of the operations of the video control microcomputer 720 and the VDP 730 can be improved.

  As described above, the effect control device 700 functions as effect control means for performing effect control based on the command transmitted from the game control device 600, and the display control means for controlling the display content displayed on the variable display device 35. And a function as sound output control means for outputting sound effects and the like from the speaker 10.

  The above is the configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. Next, specific control by the game control device 600 will be described.

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main process will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the first half of the main processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the latter half of the main processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The main process is started when the gaming machine 1 is powered on. For example, it is executed when a gaming machine is turned on to start business at a game hall or when a power failure is restored.

  When the main process is executed, the game control device 600 first prohibits interruption (step A1001). Next, interrupt vector setting processing for setting a vector address indicating a jump destination executed when an interrupt occurs is executed (step A1002). Furthermore, a stack pointer that is the start address of an area in which the value of a register or the like is saved when an interrupt occurs is set (step A1003). Further, the state of the input port 623 is read (step A1004), and the interrupt processing mode is set (step A1005).

  Next, the game control device 600 sets a power-on delay timer for waiting until the programs of the subordinate control devices (the payout control device (payout board)) 640 and the effect control device 700 are normally started (step A1006). ). For example, the power-on delay timer is set to wait for 3 seconds. By controlling in this way, when the power is turned on, the game control device 600 is started first and the command is transmitted to the subordinate control device before the start-up of the payout control device 640 and the effect control device 700 is completed. By doing so, it is possible to avoid that the subordinate control device misses the transmitted command. Therefore, the game control device 600 serves as standby means for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying activation of the main control means (game control device 600) and waiting for activation of the subordinate control device when the power is turned on.

  Note that an initialization switch signal is input to the input port 623, and the operation of the initialization switch can be reliably detected by reading the state of the input port 623 before the start of the standby time. In other words, if the status of the initialization switch is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch is continuously operated from when the power is turned on until the standby time elapses. There is a need to. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by operating immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. Can be prevented from being accepted.

  When the setting of the power-on delay timer is completed, the game control device 600 executes a process for monitoring a power failure (steps A1007 to A1011). First, the game control device 600 sets the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step A1007). The power failure monitoring signal is checked by reading the power failure monitoring signal output from the power supply device 800. The number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal is, for example, twice. When a power failure occurs, the power failure monitoring signal is turned on.

  Next, the game control device 600 determines whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step A1008). Then, the determination in step A1008 is repeated for the number of checks set in the processing in step A1007 (step A1009).

  When the game control apparatus 600 has measured that the power failure monitoring signal is ON for the number of checks (the result of step A1009 is “Y”), it determines that a power failure has occurred and the power is shut off. Wait until. In this way, by checking the power failure monitoring signal for a predetermined number of checks, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection due to noise or the like. That is, the game control device 600 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 600 is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a malfunction at power-on.

  Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shut-off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here There is no need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control burden can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (result of Step A1009 is “N”), that is, when no power failure has occurred, the game control device 600 updates the power-on delay timer by −1 (Step A1010). ), It is determined whether or not the value of the power-on delay timer is 0 (step A1011). If the value of the power-on delay timer is not 0 (the result of step A1011 is “N”), that is, if the standby time has not elapsed, the process returns to step A1007.

  On the other hand, when the value of the power-on delay timer is 0 (the result of step A1011 is “Y”), that is, when the standby time has elapsed, the game control device 600 reads / writes RWM such as RAM or EEPROM. Access to (read / write memory) is permitted (step A1012). Further, all output ports are set to off (no output) (step A1013). In addition, the serial port preinstalled in the gaming microcomputer 611 is set not to be used (step A1014). In the present embodiment, the game control device 600 performs serial communication with the effect control device 700.

  Subsequently, the game control device 600 determines whether or not the initialization switch signal in the power supply device 800 is set to ON (step A1015). The initialization switch signal is a signal for setting whether or not to start a game in an initialized state when the gaming machine 1 is powered on.

  For example, if the power is turned off while the store is closed, etc., and the power is turned on when the store opens the next day, the initialization switch signal is set to ON so that the game starts in the initialized state. Is done. On the other hand, when the power is turned on again after a power failure, the initialization switch signal is turned off so that the game machine is not initialized in order to resume the game as close to the gaming state as possible before the power failure. Is set.

  When the initialization switch signal is set to OFF (the result of Step A1015 is “N”), the game control apparatus 600 checks whether the data in the power failure inspection area in the RWM is normal ( Step A1016, Step A1017). More specifically, the power outage inspection area includes a power outage inspection area 1 and a power outage inspection area 2. The power failure inspection area 1 stores power failure inspection area check data 1, and the power failure inspection area 2 stores power failure inspection area check data 2. In the process of step A1016, it is determined whether or not the power failure inspection area check data 1 stored in the power failure inspection area 1 is normal. Similarly, in the process of step A1017, it is determined whether or not the power failure inspection area check data 2 stored in the power failure inspection area 2 is normal.

  When it is determined that the power failure inspection area check data in the power failure inspection area in the RWM is normal (the results of Step A1016 and Step A1017 are “Y”), the game control apparatus 600 has verification data called a checksum. A checksum calculation process for calculating is performed (step A1018).

  Then, the game control device 600 compares the checksum value calculated in the checksum calculation process with the checksum value calculated when the power is turned off, and determines whether or not these values match ( Step A1019).

  On the other hand, in the game control device 600, when the initialization switch signal is set to ON (the result of Step A1009 is “Y”), the value of the power failure inspection area is not normal (the result of Step A1016 or Step A1017 is “ N "), if the checksum value at power-off does not match the checksum value calculated in step A1018 (the result of step A1019 is" N "), the process proceeds from step A1040 to step A1040 in FIG. The initialization process up to A1043 is executed. Details of the initialization process will be described later.

  When the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value at the time of power-off (the result of step A1019 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 600 has executed the power failure process normally, The initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be converted (step A1020). For example, information for determining whether or not the information at the time of power failure has been normally stored is stored in an area (power failure inspection area, checksum, error) in RWM (read / write memory: RAM in the embodiment) Clear the related information and the area for storing information for monitoring fraud).

  Next, the game control device 600 determines whether or not the game state at the time of the power failure is a high probability state from an area for storing the game state in the RWM (step A1021). When it is determined that the probability is not high (the result of Step A1021 is “N”), the processing after Step A1024 is executed.

  In addition, when it is determined that the gaming state at the time of the power outage is a high probability state (the result of Step A1021 is “Y”), the game control device 600 sets the high probability notification flag to ON and sets the high probability. Save in the notification flag area (step A1022). Subsequently, the LED of the high probability display unit provided in the collective display device 50 is set to ON (lighted) (step A1023).

  Furthermore, the game control device 600 transmits a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure game process number to the effect control device 700 (step A1024). The special figure game process number is a number indicating the state of the special figure game, and is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM when a power failure occurs. In this way, by transmitting the power failure recovery command corresponding to the special figure game process number to the effect control device 700, the game can be resumed in a state as close as possible to before the power failure occurs.

  Here, a case where the initialization process is executed will be described. As described above, the initialization process is executed when a gaming machine that has been normally powered off is activated or when it cannot return to the state before the occurrence of a power failure.

  In the initialization process, the game control device 600 first clears all work areas before the access prohibited area (step A1040). Further, the entire stack area after the access prohibited area is cleared (step A1041). Then, the initial value for power-on is saved in the initialized area (step A1042). Further, a command for turning on the power is transmitted to the effect control device 700 (step A1043), and the processes after step A1025 are executed.

  Note that the power failure recovery command transmitted in step A1024 and the power-on command transmitted in step A1043 include a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine and a decorative feature indicating the number of holds in FIGS. 1 includes a hold number command, a decorative special figure 2 hold number command, and a probability information command indicating a probability state. Also, depending on the state when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, if the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed when the power is turned off, the recovery screen command is used. When initialized at power-on, a power-on command is included. Furthermore, an effect mode information command indicating the state of the effect mode depending on the model, and a time-saving count information command indicating the number of remaining games in the time-saving state are included.

  When the processing of step A1024 or step A1043 is completed, the gaming control device 600 includes a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 611 (clock generator). Start (step A1025).

  The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 611. The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the crystal oscillator 613 and the CTC circuit described above. The timer interrupt signal is a signal for causing the CPU 611a to generate a timer interrupt with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) based on the divided signal. The random number update trigger signal (CTC) is supplied to the random number generation circuit based on the divided signal, and the random number generation circuit serves as a trigger for updating the random number.

  When the CTC circuit is activated, the game control device 600 performs activation setting of the random number generation circuit (step A1026). Specifically, the CPU 611a executes processing such as setting a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. At this time, it may be checked whether the random number generation circuit operates normally.

  Furthermore, the game control device 600 uses the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on as the initial values (start values) of the corresponding various initial value random numbers. (Step A1027). Thereafter, the game control device 600 permits an interrupt (step A1028).

  Note that the random number generation circuit in the CPU 611a of the present embodiment is configured such that the initial value of the soft random number register is changed each time the power is turned on, and initial values of various initial value random numbers are based on the initial value of the soft random number register. By setting a value (start value), it becomes possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to acquire illegal random numbers. The various initial value random numbers include, for example, a random number for determining a jackpot symbol (big hit symbol random number 1, a jackpot symbol random number 2), and a random number for determining a hit of a normal variation display game (a hit random number).

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 600 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (step A1029). In the present embodiment, the big hit random number is configured to be generated using a random number generated in the random number generation circuit. That is, the big hit random number is a hard random number generated by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the variation pattern random number are soft random numbers generated by software. Note that the source of various random numbers is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and the big hit random number may be a software random number, or the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the variation pattern random number may be a hardware random number. .

  Further, after the initial value random number update process is executed, the game control device 600 sets the number of times of checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 800 and read via the port and the data bus (step A1030). Normally, a value of 2 or more is set as the number of checks. It is possible to determine whether or not a power failure has occurred by checking the power failure monitoring signal. The game control device 600 determines whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step A1031). When the power failure monitoring signal is not on, that is, when there is no power failure (the result of Step A1031 is “N”), the initial value random number update processing of Step A1029 is executed again, and the processing from Step A1029 to Step A1031 is performed. Repeated execution (loop processing).

  Also, by permitting an interrupt (step A1028) before the initial value random number update process (step A1029), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process can be prioritized and executed. It becomes possible. Accordingly, since the timer interrupt process cannot be executed until the execution of the initial value random number update process is completed, it is possible to avoid a shortage of time for executing various processes included in the interrupt process.

  In the initial value random number update process (step A1029), the initial value random number update process may be executed by a timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. However, when the initial value random number update process is executed in the timer interrupt process, an interrupt is issued during the initial value random number update process in the main process in order to avoid executing the initial value random number update process in both processes. It is prohibited to release the interrupt after updating the initial random number. However, if the initial value random number update process is not executed in the timer interrupt process and the initial value random number update process is executed only in the main process as in this embodiment, the interrupt can be canceled before the initial value random number update process. There is no problem, and there is an advantage that the main processing is simplified. Further, various random numbers may be updated not in the timer interrupt process but in the main process.

  The detection of the occurrence of a power failure (check of the power failure monitoring signal) may be executed by a timer interrupt process. At this time, the detection result may be monitored by the main process, or may be waited until it is reset.

  On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is set to ON (the result of Step A1031 is “Y”), the game control device 600 continuously detects that the power failure monitoring signal is set to ON. Determines whether the number of checks set in the process of step A1030 has been reached (step A1032). If the number of times that the power failure monitoring signal is continuously turned on has not reached the number of checks (the result of step A 1032 is “N”), is the power failure monitoring signal turned on again? It is determined whether or not (step A1031). That is, when the power failure monitoring signal is on, it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks.

  When the number of times that the gaming power monitoring signal is continuously turned on reaches the number of checks (the result of step A 1032 is “Y”), the gaming control device 600 assumes that a power failure has occurred. The processing at the time of occurrence of a power failure is executed (step A1033 to step A1039).

  The game control device 600 prohibits interruption (step A1033) and sets all output ports to off (step A1034). Thereafter, the power failure recovery inspection region check data 1 is saved in the power failure recovery inspection region 1 (step A1035), and further, the power failure recovery inspection region check data 2 is saved in the power failure recovery inspection region 2 (step A1036).

  Furthermore, the game control device 600 executes a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum when the RWM is powered off (step A1037), and saves (saves) the calculated checksum value in the checksum area of the RWM. (Step A1038). Finally, access to the RWM is prohibited so that the contents of the RWM are not changed (step A1039), and the system waits until the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off. In this way, by saving check data in the power failure recovery inspection area and calculating and storing the checksum at the time of power-off, the information stored in the RWM before power-off is correctly backed up. It is possible to determine when the power is turned on again.

[Timer interrupt processing (game control device)]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic (for example, 1 millisecond cycle) timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 611a.

  When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 600 first saves the register by moving the value held in the predetermined register to the RWM (step A1101). In this embodiment, a Z80 microcomputer is used as the game microcomputer. The Z80 microcomputer has a front register and a back register, and the processing in step A1101 can be implemented by saving the value held in the front register to the back register.

  Next, the game control device 600 takes in input signals from various sensors and switches inputted via the input unit 620, and executes an input process of reading the state of each input port (step A1102). The various sensors include a first start port switch 601, a second start port switch 602, a conventional gate switch 603, lower count switches 605a to 605m, an upper count switch 606, a first passage detection sensor 607a, and a second passage detection sensor. 607b and the like are included. In the input process, the input information is confirmed by performing chattering removal or the like on the input signal.

  Further, the game control device 600 executes output processing for transmitting output data related to game control set in various processes to the effect control device 700 and the payout control device 640 (step A1103). The output data is information for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid, and the solenoids to be controlled include, for example, a big prize opening solenoid 28 and a general electric solenoid 27. The output process also includes a process of outputting game data to an information collecting terminal device (not shown) that collects game data in the gaming machine.

  Next, the game control device 600 executes payout command transmission processing for transmitting (outputting) the command set in the transmission buffer to the payout control device 640 (step A1104). For example, a prize ball command specifying the number of prize balls to be paid out from the payout device is transmitted.

  Further, the game control device 600 executes a random number update process 1 for updating the jackpot symbol random number 1 and the jackpot symbol random number 2 (step A1105), and subsequently the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the special diagram variation display game. Random number update processing 2 is executed (step A1106). In random number update processing 1 and random number update processing 2, in order to give randomness to various random numbers, the values of counters corresponding to various random numbers (big hit random number counter, hit random number counter, presentation determination random number counter, etc.) are incremented by one To do.

  After that, the game control device 600 executes a prize opening switch / error monitoring process for monitoring various prize opening switches and the like, and monitoring errors such as unauthorized opening of a frame (step A1107). The various winning opening switches include, for example, a first start opening switch 601, a second starting opening switch 602, a gate switch 603, winning opening switches 604a to 604n, lower count switches 605a to 605m, and upper count switch 606. In the prize opening switch / error monitoring process, it is monitored whether a normal signal is input from these switches. As for error monitoring, the front frame 5 and the glass frame 6 are targeted for unauthorized opening.

  Next, the game control device 600 executes a distribution state process for controlling the operation of the distribution device 90 for determining the number of big hit rounds in the special game state. Details of the distribution state process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the game control device 600 executes a special figure game process for performing a process related to the special figure variation display game (step A1109). Details of the special game process will be described later with reference to FIG. Further, two types of special figure game processing may be prepared for normal time and big hit time corresponding to the result of the variable display game to be started.

  Subsequently, the game control device 600 executes a general game process for performing a process related to the general map variable display game (step A1110).

  Next, the game control device 600 executes a segment LED editing process for controlling the display contents of the segment LED for displaying the special figure variation game and various information related to the game (step A1111). Specifically, the parameters for outputting the results of the special map variation display game and the general map variation display game to the segment LED (for example, the collective display device 50) are edited.

  The game control device 600 checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 23 and executes a magnet error monitoring process for determining whether or not there is an abnormality (step A1112). Further, the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 24 is checked, and radio wave fraud monitoring processing for determining whether there is an abnormality is executed (step A1113). When the occurrence of an abnormality is detected, a notification sound is output from the speaker 10 or the gaming state notification LED 12 is turned on to notify the outside.

  Next, the game control device 600 executes an external information editing process for editing various signals output from the external information terminal 660 (step A1114).

  Then, the game control device 600 clears the interrupt request and declares the end of the interrupt (step A1115). Thereafter, the register temporarily saved in the process of step A1101 is restored (step A1116), the interrupt and timer interrupt by the prohibited external device are permitted (step A1117), the timer interrupt process is terminated, and the main process Return to.

[Distribution status update processing]
Next, details of the distribution state update process (step A1108) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In this process, the distribution state of the switching unit 93 provided in the distribution device 90 disposed in the upper right part of the center case is switched at a predetermined interval (in this embodiment, 5 seconds), and distribution state information is displayed. This is a process for outputting a command to the effect control device 700. FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of distribution state update processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control device 600 first determines whether or not the distribution state has been initialized (step A7001). In the present embodiment, the initial state of the distribution member (switching unit 93) is “fluctuation side”. When the distribution state has been initialized (the result of Step A7001 is “Y”), the game control device 600 executes the processing after Step A7007.

  On the other hand, when the distribution state has not been initialized (the result of Step A7001 is “N”), the game control device 600 executes the distribution state initialization process (Step A7002). Then, it is determined whether or not initialization has been completed (step A7003). If the initialization is not completed (the result of step A7003 is “N”), in order to make the processing after A7004 wait until initialization of the distribution state of the distribution member (switching unit 93) is completed, The state update process ends.

  When the initialization of the switching unit 93 is completed (the result of Step A7003 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 600 prepares a distribution state command corresponding to the initial distribution state (Step A7004). A setting process is executed (step A7005). Further, a switching timer for setting the timing for switching the distribution state is set (step A7006). In this embodiment, the time set for the switching timer is 5 seconds.

  Subsequently, if the switching timer is not 0, the game control device 600 updates the timer by −1 (step A7007). Then, it is determined whether or not the switching timer has reached 0 (step A7008). When the switching timer reaches 0 (the result of step A7008 is “Y”), since it is the timing to switch the distribution state, the state change of the distribution member (switching unit 93) is set (step A7014), The switching timer is set to 5 seconds (step A7015).

  On the other hand, when the switching timer is not 0 (the result of Step A7008 is “N”), the game control apparatus 600 determines whether or not the distribution state is being changed (Step A7009). If the distribution state is not being changed (the result of step A7009 is “N”), the distribution state change has been completed, and thus this processing is terminated.

  If the distribution state is being changed (the result of Step A7009 is “Y”), the game control device 600 executes the distribution state change process (Step A7010). Then, it is determined whether or not the distribution state has been changed (step A7011). If the change of the distribution state has not been completed (the result of Step A7011 is “N”), this process ends.

  When the change of the distribution state is completed (the result of Step A7011 is “Y”), the game control device 600 prepares a distribution state command corresponding to the changed distribution state (Step A7012). A setting process is executed (step A7013).

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special game process (step A1109) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special game process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  In the special figure game process, monitoring of game balls passing through the first passing gate portion (lottery gate) 34g and the second passing gate portion (fixed gate) 34h, input by the first start port switch 601 and the second start port switch 602 are performed. Signal monitoring, control of the entire process relating to the special figure variation display game, and setting of display of special figures (identification symbols and identification information) are performed.

  The game control device 600 first executes a pass gate switch monitoring process for monitoring the passing of the game balls of the first pass gate unit 34g and the second pass gate unit 34h (step A1201). The passing gate switch monitoring process is a process of extracting and storing a random number for determining a big hit round according to the passed gate. Details of the pass gate switch monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the game control device 600 executes a start switch monitoring process for monitoring winnings of the first start port switch 601 and the second start port switch 602 (step A1202).

  In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins at the first start winning port 37 and the second start winning port 38, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted, and a special variable display game based on the win Prior to the start of the game, a game result pre-determination is made to pre-determine a game result based on a prize. The details of the start port switch monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the game control device 600 executes a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A1203). In the big winning opening switch monitoring process, the game balls won by the upper count switch 606 provided in the second special variable winning device 42 and the lower count switches 605a to 605m provided in the first special variable winning device 41 are detected. The number of winning game balls is monitored.

  Next, the game control apparatus 600 updates the special figure game process timer by -1 if the special figure game process timer has not already expired (step A1204). Then, it is checked whether or not the special figure game processing timer has expired (step A1205). It should be noted that the special figure game process timer is set with the variation time of the special figure variation display game to be executed as an initial value, and the value of the special figure game process timer is decremented by 1 in the process of step A1204. When the value of the special figure game processing timer becomes 0, it is determined that the time is up. Note that the variation time may be measured by updating the variation control timer only when the variation display game is executed.

  When the special game process timer has not expired (the result of Step A1205 is “N”), the game control apparatus 600 executes the processes after Step A1218.

  On the other hand, when the special game processing timer expires (the result of step A1205 is “Y”), the game control device 600 refers to the special game to be branched to the process corresponding to the special game process number. The sequence branch table is set in the register (step A1206). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired based on the table (step A1207). Then, the return address after the branch process ends is saved in the stack area (step A1208), and the process is branched according to the game process number (step A1209).

  When the game process number is “0” (the result of step A1209 is “0”), the game control apparatus 600 executes a special figure routine process (step A1210). The special chart routine process monitors the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game, sets the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game, sets the effects, sets the information necessary to execute the special figure fluctuation processing, etc. Do. Details of the special figure routine processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “1” (the result of step A1209 is “1”), the game control apparatus 600 executes the special figure changing process (step A1211). In the special figure changing process, the stop display time of the identification information in the special figure changing display game, the setting of information necessary for performing the special figure display process, and the like are performed. Details of the special figure changing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “2” (the result of step A1209 is “2”), the game control apparatus 600 executes a special figure display process (step A1212). In the special figure display process, if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command setting according to the type of the big hit, the fanfare time corresponding to the big winning opening opening pattern of each big hit, Information necessary for performing fanfare / interval processing is set. In addition, information necessary for performing the big hit round determination process is set. Details of the special figure display processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “3” (the result of step A1209 is “3”), the game control apparatus 600 executes a big hit round determination process (step A1213). The jackpot round determination process is a process for determining a jackpot round when the second special result jackpot occurs. The big hit round is determined based on the values stored in the pass flag storage area and the round random number storage area in the pass gate switch monitoring process. Details of the big hit round determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “4” (the result of step A1209 is “4”), the game control apparatus 600 executes the fanfare / inter-interval process (step A1214). In the fanfare / interval processing, setting of the opening time of the big prize opening, updating of the number of times of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the processing during opening of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. Details of the fanfare / interval processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “5” (the result of step A1209 is “5”), the game control apparatus 600 executes a special winning opening open process (step A1215). The processing during opening of the big prize opening is necessary to set an interval command if the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the command of the big hit end screen if the big round is the final round, or to perform the big prize opening remaining ball processing Set information.

  When the game process number is “6” (the result of step A1209 is “6”), the game control apparatus 600 executes the big winning opening remaining ball process (step A1216). In the winning ball remaining ball processing, when the big hit round is the final round, the time for the remaining ball in the big winning mouth to be discharged is set, or the information necessary to perform the big hit end processing is set Or

  In the winning prize remaining ball process, information necessary for updating the special symbol process timer and performing the fanfare / interval process or the big hit end process is set. In addition, it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening has elapsed, or a predetermined number (predetermined number) of game balls have been won in the big prize opening, and the opening / closing door 41a is closed when any of the conditions is met. To do. After this is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds, the special figure game process number is set to “7”.

  When the game process number is “7” (the result of step A1209 is “7”), the game control device 600 executes a jackpot end process (step A1217). In the jackpot end process, information necessary for performing the special figure routine process in step A1209 is set. Details of the big hit end process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After that, the game control device 600 prepares a table for controlling the variation of symbols in the collective display device 50 (special display 1 display 51) (step A1218). Subsequently, a symbol variation control process corresponding to the collective display device 50 (special figure 1 display 51) is executed (step A1219).

  Further, the game control device 600 prepares a table for controlling the variation of symbols in the collective display device 50 (special figure 2 display 52) (step A1220). Subsequently, a symbol variation control process corresponding to the collective display device 50 (special figure 2 display 52) is executed (step A1221).

[Passing gate switch monitoring processing]
Next, details of the passing gate switch monitoring process (step A1201) in the special figure game process described above will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the pass gate switch monitoring process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  When the pass gate switch monitoring process is started, the game control device 600 first determines whether or not the first pass detection sensor 607a is turned on, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the first pass gate unit 34g. (Step A7001). When the first passage detection sensor 607a is on (the result of Step A7001 is “Y”), the first passage flag is saved in the passage flag storage area (Step A7002). As described above, the first passing gate part 34g is arranged on the variable side, and is the first in the round number determination game (auxiliary game) executed after the special figure change display game has the second special result. When a game ball passes through the passing gate part 34g, either a round 5 or 15 rounds is performed.

  When the first passage detection sensor 607a is not turned on (the result of Step A7001 is “N”), the game control device 600 determines whether or not the second passage detection sensor 607b is turned on, that is, the first It is determined whether or not a game ball has passed through the 2-pass gate 34h (step A7003). If the second passage detection sensor 607b is on (the result of step A7003 is “Y”), the second passage flag is saved in the passage flag storage area (step A7004). As described above, the second passage gate portion 34h is arranged on the fixed side, and the second number in the round number determination game (auxiliary game) executed after the special figure change display game has the second special result. When a game ball passes through the passing gate portion 34h, the number of big hit rounds is always 10 rounds.

  When the first passage detection sensor 607a is not turned on and the second passage detection sensor 607b is not turned on (the result of Step A7003 is “N”), the game control device 600 performs this processing. Exit.

  When the game ball passes through either the first pass gate part 34g or the second pass gate part 34h and saves the pass flag in the pass flag storage area, the game control device 600 further extracts a round decision random number, The extracted random number is saved in the round random number storage area (step A7105). Even if a fixed round is selected, a round determination random number is extracted and a lottery of lottery rounds is performed, but only when a variable round is selected, a round determination random number is extracted. It may be.

  Subsequently, the game control device 600 determines whether or not a big hit round is being determined (step A7106). Whether or not the big hit round is being determined may be determined by determining whether or not the special figure game process number is “3”. If the game control device 600 is determining the big hit round (the result of step A7106 is “Y”), the game control device 600 ends this processing to determine the big hit round in the big hit round determination processing (step A1213) in the special figure game processing. To do.

  On the other hand, when the big hit round is not being determined (the result of step A7106 is “N”), the game control device 600 determines whether or not the current gaming state is a big hit (step A7107). If it is not a big hit (the result of step A7107 is “N”), even though it is not a big hit (for example, waiting for customers, normal gaming state, short-time state, etc.), the player is right-handed Then, a right-handed warning (left-handed) command is prepared (step A7108), and command setting processing is executed (step A7109). When receiving the right-handed warning (left-handed) command, the effect control device 700 displays a warning prompting the user to make a left-handed one. The warning display may be performed on the variable display device 35, but may be performed on the display (hereinafter referred to as “sub display device”) 480 provided in the upper effect device 400 so as not to hinder the effect of the game.

  When the current gaming state is a big hit (the result of step A7107 is “Y”), the game control device 600 clears the passage flag storage area and the round random number storage area when the process of step A7109 is completed ( Step A7110). That is, when the big hit round is being determined, since the passage flag storage area and the round random number storage area are not cleared, in the big hit round determination process described later, based on the values stored in the passage flag storage area and the round random number storage area, The number of rounds can be determined.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process in the special figure game process described above will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of start port switch monitoring processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  When the start port switch monitoring process is started, the game control device 600 first prepares a table for setting information on hold due to winning of a game ball in the first start winning port 37 (step A1301).

  Subsequently, the game control device 600 executes a special-purpose start port switch common process that is executed in common when a game ball has won the first start winning port 37 or the second starting winning port 38 (step A1302). . Details of the special figure start port switch common process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, in the game control device 600, the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device, movable member 38a of the second start winning port 38) is operating, that is, the movable member 38a of the second starting winning port 38 is a game. It is determined whether or not the ball is open so that a winning of a ball is possible (step A1303). When the ordinary electric accessory is in operation (the result of step A1303 is “Y”), the processing after step A1305 is executed.

  On the other hand, when the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (the result of Step A1303 is “N”), the game control device 600 determines whether or not a general electric power wrong prize has occurred (Step A1304).

  More specifically, the second power prize winning opening 38 cannot receive a game ball when the movable member 38a is closed, and can receive a game ball only when the movable member 38a is open. Therefore, when the game ball wins in the closed state, there is a high possibility that some abnormality or fraud has occurred, and when there is a game ball won in the closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal wins. In the process of step A1304, it is determined whether or not the number of illegal prizes thus counted is equal to or greater than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value, for example, 5).

  The game control device 600 relates to the special figure variation display game as winning or invalidating the game ball to the second start winning opening 38 when the general electric power illegal winning has occurred (the result of Step A1304 is “Y”). The start port switch monitoring process is terminated without executing the process.

  On the other hand, the game control apparatus 600 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the second start winning opening 38 when the unauthorized power prize has not occurred (the result of Step A1304 is “N”) (Step S1304). A1305), special figure start port switch common processing is executed (step A1306). Thereafter, the start port switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special figure start port switch common process (step A1302, step A1306) in the start port switch monitoring process described above will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure start port switch common process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The special chart start port switch common processing is when a signal is input from the first start port switch 601 or the second start port switch 602 because the game ball has won the first start winning port 37 or the second start winning port 38. This process is executed in common.

  First, the game control device 600 checks whether a signal is input from a monitored start port switch (for example, the first start port switch 601) of the first start port switch 601 and the second start port switch 602. (Step A1401). If no signal is input from the monitoring target start port switch (the result of step A1401 is "N"), the special-purpose start port switch common process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when a signal is input from the start port switch to be monitored (the result of step A1401 is “Y”), the game control device 600 has latch data in the random number latch register corresponding to the start port to be monitored. Whether or not random numbers have been extracted (step A1402). If the random number has not been extracted (the result of step A1402 is “N”), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

  When there is latch data in the random number latch register corresponding to the monitored start port (the result of step A1402 is “Y”), the game control device 600 sets the start port winning flag corresponding to the monitored start port switch. Saving in a predetermined area of the RWM (step A1403). Furthermore, the big hit random number extracted to the hard random number latch register corresponding to the monitoring target start port switch is loaded, and preparation for use in the subsequent processing is performed (step A1404).

  Subsequently, the game control device 600 outputs the number of times information related to the number of times of winning in the start winning port corresponding to the monitored start port switch is output to the management device outside the gaming machine 1 (start port signal output). Load) (step A1405). Then, it is updated by adding 1 to the loaded value (step A1406), and it is checked whether or not the start port signal output count overflows (step A1407).

  When the start port signal output count does not overflow (the result of step A1407 is “N”), the game control device 600 sets the updated start port signal output count value to the RWM start port signal output count area. (Step A1408).

  The game control device 600 updates the update target corresponding to the monitored start port switch after the processing of step A1408 is completed or when the start port signal output count overflows (the result of step A1407 is “Y”). It is determined whether or not the number of special figure pending (starting memory) is less than the upper limit (step A1409).

  When the special figure hold number is less than the upper limit value (the result of step A1409 is “Y”), the game control device 600 sets information corresponding to the winning detected by the start port switch. Specifically, first, 1 is added to the number of special figure hold to be updated (for example, the number of special figure 1 hold) to update (step A1410).

  Subsequently, the game control device 600 prepares a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored and the special figure hold number (step A1411). The decoration special figure reservation number command is composed of a MODE part and an ACTION part. At this time, the prefetch result corresponding to the newly generated start memory may be transmitted together with the decoration special figure hold number command. For example, a value indicating the prefetching result may be added to the ACTION part of the decoration special figure reservation number command.

  More specifically, the game control device 600 first prepares a decoration special figure hold number command (MODE) for the start port switch to be monitored, and further displays a decoration special figure hold number command ( ACTION) is prepared. Then, a command setting process for setting the prepared special figure reservation number command is executed (step A1412).

  Next, the game control device 600 calculates the address of the random number save area corresponding to the updated special figure hold number (step A1413). Then, the big hit random number acquired in the process of step A1404 is saved in the big hit random number save area of the RWM (step A1414). Further, the jackpot symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step A1415). Thereafter, the prepared jackpot symbol random number is saved in the RWM jackpot symbol random number saving area (step A1416).

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 600 extracts a variation pattern random number, and saves the extracted value in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step A1417). Specifically, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted and saved in the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number storage areas. The variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are used, for example, for individually setting the variation patterns of the first half and the second half, or for executing a specific effect.

  Fluctuation pattern random numbers (variation patterns 1 to 3) for determining a variation pattern in the first or second special figure variation display game (including the execution time of the variation display game in variation display without various reach and reach), Unlike the big hit symbol random number which is updated by the software of the random number generation circuit, it is updated by the game control program. Note that the update of the variation pattern random number is not limited to being performed by the game control program, but may be performed by hardware or software of the random number generation circuit.

  Then, the game control device 600 loads a jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the monitored start port switch saved in the RWM in the process of step A1416, and executes the special figure hold information determination process (step A1418). Details of the special figure hold information determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the special figure hold number is not less than the upper limit (the result of step A1409 is “N”), the game control apparatus 600 prepares a decorative special figure hold number command (pending overflow command) (step A1419). Command setting processing is executed (step A1420). Then, the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A1418) in the special figure start port switch common process (FIG. 52) described above will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of special figure hold information determination processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The special figure hold information determination process is a prefetching process for determining the result related information (game result information) corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on each start memory.

  The game control device 600 first determines whether or not the pre-reading effect (notice) execution condition is satisfied (step A1501). The execution condition of the pre-reading effect is, for example, that when the game ball wins the first start winning opening 37, there is no general power support and it is not in the special game state. Further, when the game ball wins the second start winning opening 38, the execution condition for the prefetch effect is always satisfied. In the case of the normal gaming state, it is also determined that the condition for transmitting the prefetch prohibition command, that is, the condition for executing the prefetch effect is not satisfied even when the number of executions of the variable display game is less than 8 after the power failure is restored. Also good. If the execution condition for the prefetch effect is not satisfied (the result of step A1501 is “N”), the game control device 600 ends the special figure hold information determination process.

  In addition, when the result of the normal map display game is a win in the normal gaming state (non-electric support state), the public member short opening that the movable member 38a opens for a short time with a probability of 4/5, or 1 / In the specification in which the normal power long open, in which the movable member 38a is opened for a long time (0.5 + 5 seconds) with a 5-probability, is selected, the pre-reading is not performed for the start-up memory in FIG. Pre-reading may be performed for the start-up memory of the special figure 2 that was won when the public electric long opening occurred.

  On the other hand, the game control device 600 determines whether or not the newly stored start memory is a big hit when the execution condition of the prefetch effect is satisfied (the result of step A1501 is “Y”). Processing is executed (step A1502). The big hit determination process determines whether or not the result of the variable display game related to the start memory is a big hit by determining whether or not the big hit random number value included in the pending start memory matches the big hit determination value. judge.

  The game control device 600 determines whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination process in step A1502 is a jackpot (step A1503). If the determination result of the big hit determination process is not a big hit (the result of step A1503 is “N”), the stoppage stop symbol pattern is set as the stop symbol pattern (step A1506). And the process after step A1507 is performed.

  On the other hand, if the determination result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot (the result of step A1503 is “Y”), the game control device 600 uses the jackpot symbol random number check table corresponding to the winning start port as the identification symbol at the time of the jackpot. It is set as a table for identification (step A1504). In the jackpot symbol random number check table, a determination value of a random number indicating a distribution rate of whether or not the jackpot is hit and a jackpot stop symbol pattern corresponding to the determination value are defined.

  Further, the game control device 600 checks the jackpot symbol random number from the jackpot symbol random number check table set in the process of step A1504, and acquires and sets the corresponding jackpot symbol stop symbol pattern (step A1505).

  Subsequently, the game control device 600 saves the jackpot stop symbol pattern set in the process of Step A1505 or the loss stop symbol pattern set in the process of Step A1506 in the prefetch stop symbol stop pattern area (Step A1507). Further, a pre-read symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A1508), and command setting processing is executed (step A1509).

  Next, the game control device 600 executes special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information set for the monitoring target start port (step A1510). Details of the special figure information setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, the game control device 600 prepares the latter half variation pattern setting information table corresponding to the start target to be monitored in order to set the latter half variation pattern among the variation modes in the special figure variation display game (step A1510). Then, the variation pattern setting process for setting the entire variation pattern is executed (step A1511). Details of the variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Note that a variation pattern setting process may be defined for each result of the special figure fluctuation display game, and a corresponding fluctuation pattern setting process may be executed according to the result of the target special figure fluctuation display game.

  Finally, the game control device 600 prepares a prefetch variation pattern command corresponding to the first and second variation numbers set in the variation pattern setting process (step A1513), and executes the command setting process (step A1514). Thereafter, the special figure hold information determination process is terminated.

  As described above, in the special figure hold information determination process, before executing the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the start memory, the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is acquired and notified to the effect control device 700. Is possible. The effect control device 700 changes the display mode of the start-up memory display displayed on the variation display device 35, for example, and gives the player the result of the special diagram variation display game before the start timing of the special diagram variation display game. Is notified. Here, the game control device 600 functions as a prior determination unit, and the effect control device 700 functions as a prior notification unit.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, the details of the special figure routine process (step A1210) in the special figure game process described above will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure routine processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control device 600 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) is 0 (step A1601). Further, when the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (the result of step A1601 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the first start memory number (special figure 1 hold number) is 0 (step A1606). . Thus, by performing the special figure 2 hold number check (step A1601) before the special figure 1 hold number check (step A1606), it is more advantageous for the player than the first special figure fluctuation display game. The second special figure fluctuation display game is preferentially executed.

  When the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 (the result of step A1601 is “N”), the game control device 600 prepares a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number (step A1602). Command setting processing is executed (step A1603). Furthermore, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process for executing the special figure fluctuation display game is executed (step A1604). Details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Thereafter, the game control device 600 executes a special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) for preparing a table (for the second special figure) for shifting to the special figure changing process (step A1605), Special figure routine processing ends. Details of the special figure changing process transition setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (the result of step A1606 is “N”), the game control apparatus 600 prepares a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number (step A1607). ), Command setting processing is executed (step A1608). Furthermore, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process for executing the special figure fluctuation display game is executed (step A1609). Details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Thereafter, the game control device 600 executes a special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) for preparing a table (for the first special figure) for shifting to the special figure changing process (step A1610). Special figure routine processing ends. Details of the special figure changing process transition setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  It should be noted that the decoration special figure hold number command may be transmitted to the effect control apparatus 700 only when the hold number changes.

  On the other hand, when the special figure 1 hold number is 0 (the result of step A1606 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 600 determines whether or not a customer waiting demonstration has already started (step A1611). If the customer waiting demo has not started, that is, if it has not been started (the result of step A1611 is “N”), the customer waiting demo flag is saved in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A1612). Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A1613), and a command setting process is executed (step A1614).

  On the other hand, when the customer waiting demo has already started (the result of step A1606 is “Y”), the game control device 600 has already set the customer waiting demo flag in the customer waiting demo flag area, Since the demo command has already been transmitted to the effect control device 700, the processing after step A1615 is executed.

  Finally, the game control device 600 executes the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 for preparing a table for shifting to the special figure normal process (step A1615). Specifically, a process of setting a processing number “0” corresponding to the special figure routine processing, a flag (big prize opening fraud monitoring information) for defining a big prize opening fraud monitoring period, and the like in the table is executed. Thereafter, the special figure routine processing is terminated.

[Special figure change start processing]
Next, details of the special figure change start process (step A1604, step A1609) in the special figure ordinary process described above will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure fluctuation start process according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 55A shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start process executed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. , (B) is a special figure 2 fluctuation start process executed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game. First, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described.

  The game control device 600 saves the special figure 1 fluctuation flag (fluctuating flag) in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area of the RWM (step A1701). Next, a big hit flag 1 setting process for setting the big hit flag 1 when the result of the first special figure variation display game corresponding to the earliest start memory is a big hit is executed (step A1702).

  Next, the game control device 600 executes a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process corresponding to the setting of the first special figure stop symbol (special figure 1 stop symbol) (step A1703). Details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, the game control device 600 executes special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information (step A1708). Details of the special figure information setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the game control device 600 prepares a special figure 1 pattern setting information table for setting information related to the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) for the special figure 1 based on the random number stored as the start memory (step A1705). . Subsequently, a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game is executed (step A1706). Details of the variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Finally, the game control device 600 executes a change start information setting process for setting information for starting the first special figure change display game (step A1707), and ends the special figure 1 change start process. Details of the change start information setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Moreover, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A1609) shown in (B) is the same procedure as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and a process corresponding to special figure 2 is executed instead of special figure 1.

  Next, details of the special figure stop symbol setting process (step A1703, step A1713) in the special figure fluctuation start process described above will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process according to the first embodiment of this invention. FIG. 57 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control device 600 first determines whether or not the big hit flag 1 is set, that is, whether or not the result of the target special figure 1 fluctuation display game is a big hit (step A1801a). If the big hit flag 1 is set (the result of step A1801a is “Y”), the random number is stored from the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area corresponding to the holding number 1, that is, the start memory where the change starts. Load (step A1802a). Further, a jackpot symbol table for special figure 1 is set as a table for determining a stop symbol (step A1803a).

  Next, the game control apparatus 600 acquires the stop symbol number corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number acquired by the process of step A1802a from the jackpot symbol table for special figure 1 set by the process of step A1803a, and acquires the stop symbol acquired. The number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step A1804a).

  Subsequently, the game control device 600 sets a jackpot stop symbol information table corresponding to the current gaming state (step A1805a). Then, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired from the jackpot stop symbol information table and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A1806a). Further, a probability variation determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the probability variation determination flag area (step A1807a).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not set (the result of Step A1801a is “N”), the game control device 600 acquires the stop symbol number at the time of loss, and stops the acquired stop symbol number as the special symbol 1 stop. Save in the symbol area (step A1808a). Further, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A1809a).

  When the processing of step A1807a or step A1809a is completed, the game control device 600 prepares a decoration special figure 1 command including an ACTION part and a MODE part corresponding to the stop symbol pattern from the decoration special figure command table (step A1810a). Furthermore, the decoration special figure command acquired by the process of step A1810a is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A1811a), and the command setting process is executed (step A1812a).

  Furthermore, the game control device 600 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (step A1813a). Finally, the jackpot symbol random number saving area for special figure 1 is cleared to 0 (step A1814a). Then, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

  Also, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 57 is executed in the same manner as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process because the process corresponding to the special figure 2 is executed instead of the special figure 1, and the description is omitted. To do.

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, details of the special figure information setting process (step A1704, step A1714) in the special figure fluctuation start process described above will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of special figure information setting processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control device 600 first determines whether or not the game state is a time-short state (step A1901). If it is not the time saving state (the result of Step A1901 is “N”), a normal variation pattern selection group information table is set (Step A1902). On the other hand, if the time is short (the result of step A1901 is “Y”), the time variation variable pattern selection group information table is set (step A1903).

  When the variation pattern selection group information table is set, the game control device 600 loads the special figure holding number corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag from the set variation pattern selection group information table (step A1904). Further, the fluctuation pattern selection group information corresponding to the special figure hold number is acquired and saved in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area (step A1905).

  Thereby, in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area, the type of special figure (Special figure 1 or Special figure 2) for starting the fluctuation, the number-of-holds information that is information on the number of start memories for the type of special figure, The variable distribution information 1 obtained from the game state information including information on whether or not the state is saved is saved. This fluctuation distribution information 1 is used to select a fluctuation group later.

  A variation group includes a plurality of variation patterns. When determining a variation pattern, first select the variation group, and then select one variation pattern from the variation group. It has become. When selecting one fluctuation pattern, another new random number may be acquired.

  Subsequently, the game control device 600 sets a distribution base pointer table (step A1906), and acquires a distribution base pointer corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A1907). Furthermore, the effect mode number is added to the acquired distribution base pointer (step A1908), the value after the addition is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step A1909), and the special figure information setting process is terminated.

  Thereby, the variable distribution information 2 acquired based on the stop symbol pattern information and the effect mode information is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is used to select a fluctuation group later. In addition, as for the production mode, one production mode is set from a plurality of production modes according to the probability state, the presence / absence of the short-time state, the progress status of the special figure variation display game, and the like.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the variation pattern setting process (step A1706, step A1716) in the special figure variation start process described above will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of variation pattern setting processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. Note that the fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation that is a fluctuation aspect from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. First, the second half variation pattern is set first, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

  When the variation pattern setting process is started, the game control device 600 first sets the variation group selection address table (step A2001), and acquires and prepares the address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2. (Step A2002).

  Then, the game control device 600 determines whether or not the effect mode number is less than 2 (either 0 or 1) (step A2003). If the effect mode number is not less than 2 (the result of Step A2003 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the stop symbol pattern is a discontinuation stop symbol pattern (Step A2004). If the stop symbol pattern is not an outlier stop symbol pattern (the result of step A2004 is “N”), the variable pattern random number 1 is loaded from the target variable pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of holdings 1) and prepared. (Step A2007).

  On the other hand, the game control device 600 determines that the production mode number is less than 2 (the result of step A2003 is “Y”), or the stop symbol pattern is an outlier stop symbol pattern (the result of step A2004 is “ Y "), the address of the table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 1 is acquired from the latter half fluctuation group table prepared in the process of step A2002 (step A2005). Next, the acquired address is prepared as the address of the second-half fluctuation group (step A2006), and the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the target fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A2007).

  In addition, when the production mode number is less than 2 or when the stop symbol pattern is a discontinuous stop symbol pattern, the address is also taken into account the variable distribution information 1 obtained from the hold number information that is information related to the start memory number Thus, the variation pattern selection mode is made different depending on the number of start memories.

  Thereafter, the game control device 600 executes a 2-byte distribution process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1 (step A2008). The address of the latter half variation selection table selected by the 2-byte distribution process is acquired and prepared (step A2009). Further, the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target fluctuation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the holding number 1) and prepared (step A2010).

  Further, the game control device 600 executes a distribution process for selecting the latter half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2 (step A2011). Then, the latter half variation number selected by the distribution process is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (step A2012). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

  Next, the game control device 600 sets the first half variation group table (step A2013), and calculates a table selection pointer based on the variation distribution information 1 and the variation distribution information 2 (including the determined second half variation number). (Step A2014). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step A2015), and a random number is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A2016). ).

  After that, the game control device 600 executes a sorting process for selecting the first variation pattern (first variation number) of the special figure variation display game from the first variation selection table (first variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 3 ( Step A2017). Then, the first half variation number selected by the distribution process is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step A2018), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the change start information setting process (step A1707, step A1717) in the special figure change start process described above will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of change start information setting processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  When the variation start information setting process is started, the game control device 600 first clears the random number storage areas of the target variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (step A2101). Next, the first half variation time value table is set (step A2102), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (step A2103). Further, the latter half variation time value table is set (step A2104), and the latter half variation time value corresponding to the latter half variation number is acquired (step A2105).

  Then, the game control device 600 adds the first half variation time value and the second half variation time value (step A2106), and saves the addition value in the special figure game processing timer area (step A2107). Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first variation number is prepared (step A2108), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second variation number is prepared (step A2109), and command setting processing is performed (step A2110). .

  Next, the game control device 600 updates the special figure holding number corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag by −1 (step A2111), and sets the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag (step A2112). Further, the random number storage area is shifted (step A2113), and the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step A2114).

  Thereafter, the game control device 600 first clears the stop extension information area as a process related to extension of the stop time for displaying the result of the special figure change display game (step A2115). The stop symbol pattern is a discontinuation stop symbol pattern (the result of step A2116 is “Y”), the effect mode number is 3 (the result of step A2117 is “Y”), and the remaining number of rotations in the effect mode ( If the (number of games) is 1 (the result of step A2118 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure has a high probability (high probability state) (step A2119).

  The game control device 600 saves the stop extension information 1 in the stop extension information area (step A2120) and saves the stop corresponding to the stop extension information when the special figure high probability is not in effect (the result of step A2119 is “N”). An information command is prepared (step A2122), command setting processing (step A2123) is performed, and variation start information setting processing is terminated. Thereby, the stop time is set to the special figure extension display time 1 (first extended stop time) which is longer than the normal special figure display time (normal stop time).

  In addition, when the special control probability is high (the result of Step A2119 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 600 saves the stop extension information 2 in the stop extension information area (Step A2121). Then, a stop information command corresponding to the stop extension information is prepared (step A2122), and command setting processing is executed (step A2123). Thereafter, the variation start information setting process is terminated. As a result, the stop time is set to the special figure extended display time 2 (second extended stop time) that is longer than the normal special figure display time.

  On the other hand, the game control device 600, when the stop symbol pattern is not the outlier stop symbol pattern (result of step A2116 is “N”), when the effect mode number is not 3 (result of step A2117 is “N”), or If the remaining number of revolutions (number of games) in mode 2 is not 1 (the result of step A2118 is “N”), the variation start information setting process is terminated. In this case, the stop time extension is not set and the normal stop time is set.

  In this way, the stop time of the special figure fluctuation display game is set at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, the specific rotation speed, and the state of the production mode. It has come to be. Thereby, for example, it is possible to set an effect that is continuous between the variation time and the stop time, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Through the above processing, information related to the start of the special figure variation display game is set. In other words, the game control device 600 serves as a determination unit that determines various random values stored in the start storage unit (game control device 600). In addition, the game control device 600 constitutes a variation pattern determining means that can determine the variation pattern of the identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Then, the information related to the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 700, and the effect control device 700 has the variation pattern determined based on the reception of the information related to the start of the special figure variation display game. Correspondingly, the detailed production contents in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game are set. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information related to the start memory number (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information related to the stop symbol, and a fluctuation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information related to the pattern and a stop information command including information related to the extension of the stop time are listed, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 700 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the variation command, the processing in the effect control device 700 can be efficiently advanced.

[Special figure changing process transition setting process]
Next, details of the special-fluctuation changing process transition setting process (step A1605, step A1610) in the special-figure normal process described above will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special-fluctuation changing process transition setting process according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 61 (A) shows the case of the first special-figure change display game, and FIG. This is the case of the special figure variation display game. First, the case of the first special figure variation display game will be described.

  The game control device 600 first sets “1” as the process number (step A2201), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (step A2202).

  Then, the game control device 600 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (step A2203), and saves a signal relating to the fluctuation start of FIG. 1 in the test signal output data area (step A2204). Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A2205), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking period of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blink control timer area. For example, 200 ms) is set (step A2206). Thereafter, the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) is terminated.

  The procedure for the second special figure variation display game shown in (B) is the same as that for the first special figure variation display game, and processing corresponding to special figure 2 is executed instead of special figure 1. Is done.

[Special figure changing process]
Next, details of the special figure changing process (step A1211) in the special figure game process described above will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of special figure changing processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control apparatus 600 first determines whether or not there is stop extension information (stop extension information 1 or 2) (step A2301). If there is no stop extension information (the result of step A2301 is “N”), the normal special figure display time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A2302). Then, the special figure display process transition setting process is executed (step A2306), and the special figure display process is terminated.

  In addition, when there is stop extension information (the result of Step A2301 is “Y”), the game control device 600 determines whether or not it is stop extension information 1 (Step A2303). If it is the stop extension information 1 (the result of step A2303 is “Y”), the special figure extension display time 1 (for example, 3500 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A2304). Then, the special figure display process transition setting process is executed (step A2306), and the special figure display process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the game control device 600 is not the stop extension information 1 (the result of step A2303 is “N”), that is, if it is the stop extension information 2, the special figure extension display time 2 (for example, 14300 ms) is displayed. Save in the processing timer area (step A2305). Then, the special figure display process transition setting process is executed (step A2306), and the special figure display process is terminated. That is, the game control device 600 serves as a stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

[Special map display process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the special chart display process transition setting process (step A2306) in the special figure changing process described above will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of special figure display processing transition setting processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 600 sets a process number “2” corresponding to the special figure display process (step A2401), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (step A2402).

  Next, the game control device 600 saves a signal related to the end of fluctuation in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 in the test signal output data area (step A2403, step A2404), and the special figure fluctuation display game for output to the external information terminal. The control timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the symbol determination number signal control timer area corresponding to the number of times of execution (step A2405).

  Thereafter, the game control device 600 sets a stop flag related to the variable stop on the special figure 1 display 51 as the special figure 1 display 51 for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game. (Step A2406). Further, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, a stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A2407). ), The special figure changing process transition setting process is terminated.

[Special figure display processing]
Next, the details of the special figure display process (step A1212) in the special figure game process described above will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of special figure display processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control device 600 first loads the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A2501), and clears the RWM big hit flag 2 area (step A2502). Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A2503).

  When the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (the result of step A2503 is “Y”), the game control device 600 clears the RWM jackpot flag 1 area (step A2508). Then, the test signal relating to the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the second special figure variation display game is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A2509).

  On the other hand, when the loaded big hit flag 2 is not big hit (the result of step A2503 is “N”), the game control device 600 sets the big hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process. 1 is loaded (step A2504), and the RWM jackpot flag 1 area is cleared (step A2505). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A2506).

  When the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (the result of step A2506 is “Y”), the game control device 600 sends a test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the first special figure variation display game to the RWM. Save in the test signal output data area (step A2507).

  When the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is a big hit, the game control device 600 acquires the stop symbol number from the stop symbol area (step A2510). And it is determined whether it is a stop symbol number (1st special result probability variation big hit) where the number of rounds of big hit is fixed (step A2511). When the number of rounds is not a fixed symbol number (the result of step A2511 is “N”), that is, when the symbol number is a stop symbol number (second special result normal big hit and second special result probable big hit) from which the number of rounds can be selected. If there is, the big hit round determination process transition setting process is executed (step A2512), and then the special figure display process is terminated. Details of the big hit round determination process transition setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the case of a stopped symbol number in which the number of rounds is fixed (the result of Step A2511 is “N”), the game control apparatus 600 prepares a fixed round number upper limit (16 rounds) (Step A2513). . Then, the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 is executed (step A2514), and then the special figure display process is terminated. Details of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not big hit (the result of step A2506 is “N”), the game control device 600 executes the production mode information check process related to the production mode setting (step A2516), and further the time-saving state A time-reduced variation number update process for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game is executed (step A2517). Then, the special figure normal process transition setting process is executed (step A2517), and then the special figure display process is terminated. Note that the number of executions in the short-time state may be managed at the start of the change.

[Big hit round decision process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the big hit round determination process transition setting process (step A2512) in the special figure display process described above will be described. FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing a procedure of a big hit round determination process transition setting process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control device 600 first sets “3” as the process number (step A7201), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (step A7202).

  Then, the game control device 600 prepares a round determination start command (step A7203) and executes a command setting process (step A7204). Thereafter, the big hit round determination process transition setting process is terminated. The round determination start command is a command for notifying the effect control device 700 that lottery of the number of rounds of the big hit round will be performed. When receiving the round determination start command, the effect control device 700 starts the effect of determining the big hit round.

[Big hit round decision processing]
Next, the details of the big hit round determination process (step A1213) in the special figure game process described above will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of jackpot round determination processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control device 600 first loads the passage flag set in the passage flag storage area in the passage gate switch monitoring process (FIG. 50) (step A7301) and determines whether or not the passage flag is set (step S7301). A7302). If the passage flag is not set (the result of step A7302 is “N”), it is not necessary to determine the big hit round, and the big hit round determination process is terminated.

  When the passage flag is set (the result of Step A7302 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 600 determines whether or not the set passage flag is the first (variable) passage flag ( Step A7303). In the case of the first (variation) passing flag (the result of step A7303 is “Y”), the round distribution table 1 (FIG. 41C) in which 5 rounds or 15 rounds are selected on a one-to-one basis is set. (Step A2704). On the other hand, when it is not the first (variation) passage flag (the result of step A7303 is “N”), that is, when the second (fixed) passage flag is set, the round distribution table in which 10 rounds are selected. 2 (FIG. 41D) is set (step A2705). Note that a plurality of round numbers may be set in the round distribution table 2 so that the expected value (average value) of the execution rounds is 10 rounds.

  When the round distribution table is set, the game control device 600 loads the round determination random number set in the passing gate switch monitoring process from the round random number storage area (step A2706). Furthermore, based on the loaded round determination random number, the corresponding round number is acquired from the set round distribution table (step A2707).

  Further, the game control device 600 prepares a round number determination command corresponding to the acquired round number (step A2708), and executes command setting processing (step A2709). Further, a round number upper limit value (5 rounds, 10 rounds, or 15 rounds) corresponding to the acquired round number is prepared (step A2710), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 is executed (step A2514). . Thereafter, the special figure displaying process is terminated. Details of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step A2514, step A7311) in the special figure display process and the big hit round determination process described above will be described. FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing a procedure of fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control device 600 first acquires the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information and saves it in the round number upper limit area of the RWM (step A2801). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A2802). As a result, the number of big hits is displayed on the round number display portion 59.

  Next, the game control apparatus 600 loads and prepares the decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern from the decoration special figure command area of the RWM (step A2803), and executes command setting processing (step A2804). After that, a probability information command corresponding to information for setting the probability of a hit result in the normal map variable display game and the special map variable display game to be a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A2805), and command setting processing is performed. Execute (Step A2806).

  Subsequently, the game control device 600 prepares a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process (step A2807). A setting process is executed (step A2808).

  Next, the game control device 600 saves in the external information output data area of the RWM the prize winning opening information and the signal corresponding to the probability state of the winning result in the usual figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game. (Step A2809). Thereafter, the big hit fanfare time (for example, 6000 ms or 48 ms) corresponding to the special winning opening information is saved in the special game process timer area (step A2810).

  Then, the game control device 600 clears the large winning opening illegal prize number area of the large winning opening (the first special variable winning apparatus 41 or the second special variable winning apparatus 42) corresponding to the large winning opening information (step A2811). ). Further, a fraud monitoring non-period monitoring flag is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area corresponding to the big winning opening information (step A2812).

  Next, the game control device 600 loads the special figure game mode flag (step A2813), and saves the loaded flag in the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A2814). Thereby, the information on the production mode when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state is determined based on the information stored later.

  Subsequently, the game control device 600 sets “4”, which is a process number corresponding to the fanfare / interval process (step A2815), and saves the process number in the special game process number area (step A2816).

  Next, the game control device 600 saves a signal related to the start of the big hit (special game state) in the external information output data area (step A2817), and a signal related to the end of the high probability state and the short time state in the test signal output data area. Save (step A2818).

  Thereafter, the game control device 600 clears the round number area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special gaming state (step A2819), and saves the low probability number in the gaming state display number area (step A2820). . Further, a flag for normal figure low probability & no support for ordinary call is saved in the normal game mode flag area (step A2821).

  Then, the game control device 600 clears the variation symbol determination flag area (step A2822), and further turns off the game state display LED (third game state display unit 59) corresponding to the display of the high probability state. The probability notification flag area is cleared (step A2823). Then, a special figure low probability & no short time flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A2824).

  Next, the game control device 600 saves the probability information command (low probability) in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery that saves the command output to the effect control device 700 at the time of power failure recovery (step A2825), and executes it in a short time state. The time reduction variation frequency area for managing the number of possible special figure variation display games is cleared (step A2826). As a result, the high-probability state and the short-time state are terminated, and a normal probability state and a normal operation state are obtained.

  Thereafter, the game control device 600 saves the number of the effect mode 1 in the effect mode number area (step A2827), and clears the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A2828). Then, the no-update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A2829), and further, the effect mode 1 command is saved in the effect mode command area (step A2830). Thereafter, the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 is terminated. As a result, the information on the effect mode is once cleared with the occurrence of the special game state.

[Direction mode information check processing]
Next, the details of the effect mode information check process (step A2515) in the special figure display process described above will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the effect mode information check process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control device 600 first determines whether or not the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A2901). If the next mode transition information is a no-update code (the result of step A2901 is “Y”), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of executed special figure variation display games, for example, when the effect mode that continues until the next big hit in the high probability state is selected. It is.

  In addition, when the next mode transition information is not a no-update code (the result of step A2901 is “N”), the game control apparatus 600 has an effect remaining that is the number of times that the special figure variable display game can be executed until the effect mode is changed. The number of revolutions is updated by -1 (step A2902). Then, it is determined whether or not the remaining rotational speed of the effect has become 0 (step A2903).

  When the remaining number of rotations of the effect becomes 0 (the result of step A2903 is “Y”), that is, when the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, the game control device 600 has the effect mode information address. A table is set (step A2904), and the address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information is acquired (step A2905).

  Then, the game control apparatus 600 acquires the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred and saves it in the effect mode number area (step A2906), acquires the effect remaining speed of the effect mode to be transferred, and acquires the effect remaining speed area. (Step A2907). Further, the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transitioned is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A2908).

  Thereafter, the game control device 600 prepares a command corresponding to the new effect mode number (step A2909), and saves the command in the effect mode command area (step A2910). Thereafter, a command setting process is executed (step A2911), and the effect mode information check process is terminated.

  On the other hand, the game control device 600 determines that the remaining production speed is not 0 (the result of step A2903 is “N”), that is, when the current production mode continues in the next special figure variation display game. It is determined whether the rotational speed is a specified rotational speed (for example, 8 times) (step A2912).

  When the remaining effect rotation speed is not the prescribed rotation speed (the result of step A2912 is “N”), the game control apparatus 600 ends the effect mode information check process. On the other hand, if the effect remaining rotation speed is the specified rotation speed (the result of step A2912 is “Y”), an effect mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A2913), and command setting processing is executed (step A2914). Thereafter, the effect mode information check process ends. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of notifying the switching before the specified rotational speed for switching the effect mode.

  Since the game control device 600 manages the production mode as described above, for example, control such as generation of a specific reach only in a specific production mode can be performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Time shortening fluctuation count update processing]
Next, the details of the time shortening fluctuation number update process (step A2516) in the above-described special figure display process will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the time shortening variation number update process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control device 600 first determines whether or not the special figure has a high probability (high probability state) (step A3001). If the special figure is highly probable (the result of step A3001 is “Y”), the time-variation variation frequency update process is terminated.

  On the other hand, the game control device 600 determines whether or not the special figure time is short (short time state) when the special figure high probability is not in effect (the result of step A3001 is “N”) (step A3002). If the special drawing time is not short (the result of step A3002 is “N”), the time reduction variation number update process is terminated. If the special drawing time is short (the result of step A3002 is “Y”), the time shortening variation number for managing the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game to be in the short time state is updated by −1 (step A3003). Then, it is determined whether or not the time shortening variation count has become 0 (step A3004).

  When the time reduction variation count is not 0 (the result of step A3004 is “N”), that is, when the time-short state continues in the next special figure variation display game, the game control device 600 updates the time reduction variation count processing. Exit. When the time shortening variation count is 0 (the result of step A3004 is “Y”), that is, when the time-short state ends in this special figure variation display game, a probability information command (time-short end) is prepared. (Step A3005), command setting processing is executed (Step A3006). Thereafter, a time-shortening end setting process is executed (step A3007), and the time-reduced variation number updating process is terminated.

[Time-saving end setting processing]
Next, details of the time reduction end setting process (step A3007) in the above-described time reduction variation number update process will be described. FIG. 70 is a flow chart illustrating a procedure for time-shutdown setting processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control apparatus 600 first saves a signal related to the end of time reduction in the external information output data area (step A3101), and further saves a signal related to the end of time reduction in the test signal output data area (step A3102).

  Next, the game control device 600 saves the low probability number in the game state display number area (step A3103), and saves the ordinary low probability & no power support flag in the ordinary game mode flag area (step A3103). A3104). Further, a special figure low probability & no short time flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A3105), and a probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A3106). The normal process transition setting process 2 (at the time saving end) is terminated.

[Big hits end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end process (step A1217) in the special figure game process described above will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of jackpot end processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 600 is set when the probability variation determination flag set based on the type of special result that triggered the execution of the special game state this time becomes a high probability state after the end of the special game state. It is determined whether the data is high probability data (step A3201).

  If the game control device 600 is not high-probability data (the result of step A3201 is “N”), it executes jackpot end setting processing 1 (step A3202). On the other hand, if the data is high probability data (the result of step A3201 is “Y”), the jackpot end setting process 2 is executed (step A3203).

  Thereafter, the game control device 600 prepares a probability information command corresponding to the special figure game mode flag (step A3204), and executes a command setting process (step A3205).

  Next, the game control device 600 first sets an effect mode information setting table corresponding to the stop symbol pattern in order to save information necessary for managing the effect mode (step A3206). Then, with reference to the set production mode information setting table, the production mode number of the production mode set after the end of the special gaming state is acquired and saved in the production mode number area (step A3207). Further, the effect remaining speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect remaining speed region (step A3208), and the next mode transition to the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is performed. Information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A3209).

  Thereafter, the game control device 600 prepares a command corresponding to the new effect mode number (step A3210), saves the command in the effect mode command area (step A3211), and executes a command setting process (step A3212). Finally, the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 is executed (step A3213), and the jackpot end process ends.

[Big jackpot end setting processing]
Next, details of the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A3202) and the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A3203) in the jackpot end process described above will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process according to the first embodiment of the present invention, where (A) shows the jackpot end setting process 1 and (B) shows the jackpot end setting process 2.

  First, the jackpot end setting process 1 will be described. First, the game control device 600 saves a signal related to the start of time reduction in the external information output data area (step A3301), and saves a signal related to the start of time reduction in the test signal output data area (step A3302).

  Next, the game control device 600 saves the ordinary figure high probability & ordinary power support flag in the ordinary figure game mode flag area (step A3303), and saves the special figure low probability & hourly flag in the special figure game mode flag area. (Step A 3304). After that, the probability information command (short time) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A3305), the initial value (eg, 70) of the time reduction fluctuation number is saved in the time reduction fluctuation number area (step A3306), and the big hit ends The setting process 1 ends.

  By the above processing, after the special gaming state is ended, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the normal probability state and the time shortened state. In addition, by setting an initial value (eg, 70) of the time variation number in the time variation region, the time reduction state ends when the special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times (eg, 70 times).

  Subsequently, the jackpot end setting process 2 will be described. First, the game control apparatus 600 saves a signal related to the start of high probability in the external information output data area (step A3311), and saves a signal related to the start of high probability in the test signal output data area (step A3312).

  Next, the game control device 600 saves the ordinary figure high probability & ordinary power support flag in the ordinary figure game mode flag area (step A3313), and saves the special figure high probability & hourly flag in the special figure game mode flag area. (Step A3314). Thereafter, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A3315), the time reduction variation frequency area is cleared (step A3316), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is ended.

  By the above processing, after the special game state is ended, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes a high probability state and the time is reduced until the next special result mode is derived. In other words, after the special game state ends, the game control device 600 has a specific game state (short-time state) that extends a period during which the movable member 38a of the second start winning prize port 38 is opened for a predetermined period. It is a specific game state generation control means that can be generated.

[Special Figure Normal Process Transition Setting Process 3]
Next, the details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A3213) in the jackpot end process described above will be described. FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing a procedure for a big hit end setting process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 600 sets “0” as the process number corresponding to the special figure normal process (step A3401), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (step A3402).

  Thereafter, the game control device 600 saves a signal related to the end of the big hit in the external information output data area (step A3403), and saves a signal related to the end of the big hit in the test signal output data area (step A3404).

  Subsequently, the game control device 600 clears the information in the probability variation determination flag area (step A3405), and clears the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of jackpot rounds (step A3406). Further, the number in the time zone is saved in the game state display number area (step A3407).

  Then, the game control apparatus 600 saves the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step A3408). Finally, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step A3409), and the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 is terminated.

[Design variation control processing]
Next, the details of the symbol variation control process (step A1219, step A1221) in the special figure game process described above will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the symbol variation control process according to the first embodiment of this invention. The symbol variation control process is a process for controlling the variation of special symbols such as the first special symbol and the second special symbol and setting the display data of the special symbols.

  The game control device 600 first checks whether the special figure fluctuation control flag corresponding to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is changing among the first special figure and the second special figure. (Step A3501), it is determined whether or not it is changing (Step A3502).

  When the special figure changing flag is changing (the result of step A3502 is “Y”), the game control device 600 displays a symbol corresponding to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure). A table (for variation) is acquired (step A3503). Then, of the first special figure and the second special figure, the flashing control timer corresponding to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is updated by −1 (step A3504), and the value of the timer is 0, That is, it is determined whether or not the time is up (step A3505).

  When the value of the blinking control timer is 0 (the result of step A3505 is “Y”), the game control device 600 saves the blinking control timer initial value in the blinking control timer area to be controlled (step A3506), Of the first special figure and the second special figure, the variable symbol number corresponding to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is updated by +1 (step A3507).

  Also, the game control device 600 corresponds to the value of the target variation symbol number area after the processing of step A3507 or when the value of the blinking control timer is not 0 (the result of step A3505 is “N”). Display data to be acquired is acquired (step A3508). Thereafter, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A3511), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the case where the special figure changing flag is not changing (the result of step A3502 is “N”), the game control apparatus 600 displays the symbol display table corresponding to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure). (For stop) is acquired (step A3509). Then, display data corresponding to the value of the target variation symbol number area is acquired (step A3510). Thereafter, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A3511), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

  By the above processing, the special figure corresponding to the symbol number is displayed on the special figure display (for example, the special figure 1 display 51) to be controlled among the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. The Rukoto.

[Magnetic fraud monitoring processing]
Next, details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (step A1112) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the magnet fraud monitoring process according to the first embodiment of this invention. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 23, and fraud notification is started or ended.

  First, the game control device 600 determines whether or not abnormal magnetism has been detected from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 23 and taken into the input port 622a (step A3601). When the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor 23) is on (the result of step A3601 is “Y”), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, a magnet fraud monitoring timer for counting the abnormal magnetism detection period is incremented by +1. It is updated (step A3602), and it is determined whether or not the timer has expired (step A3603).

  The game control device 600 clears the magnet fraud monitoring timer when the magnet fraud monitoring timer expires (the result of step A3603 is “Y”), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period of time. (Step A3604). Further, the initial value of the magnet fraud notification timer is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step A3605). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step A3606), and a magnet fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step A3607).

  Furthermore, the game control device 600 determines whether or not the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step A3613). That is, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the magnetic sensor 23 is continuously on for a certain period (for example, eight interruptions).

  On the other hand, when the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor 23) is not on (the result of step A3601 is “N”), that is, when no abnormal magnetism is detected, the game control device 600 clears the magnet fraud monitoring timer. (Step A3608).

  Further, the game control device 600 determines that the magnet fraud notification time is determined after the processing of step A3608 is completed or when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not expired (the result of step A3603 is “N”). If the fraud notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step A3609). The minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step A3610).

  When the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (the result of Step A3610 is “N”), that is, when the time has not expired, the game control device 600 ends the magnet fraud monitoring process. Further, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (the result of step A3610 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, and when the fraud notification period has ended, or If unauthorized notification has not been performed from the beginning, a command for terminating magnet unauthorized notification is prepared (step A3611). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step A3612), and it is determined whether or not the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step A3613).

  When the magnet fraud flag prepared in the process of step A3607 or step A3612 matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (the result of step A3613 is “Y”), the game control device 600 performs the magnet fraud monitoring process. finish. On the other hand, if the values do not match (the result of step A3613 is “N”), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step A3614), and command setting processing is executed (step A3615). Thereafter, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated.

[Radio fraud monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the radio wave fraud monitoring process (step A1113) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of radio wave fraud monitoring processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. In the radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 24, and the start or end of fraud notification is set.

  First, the game control device 600 is in a state where the radio wave sensor 24 is turned on, that is, an abnormal radio wave is detected from the state of the detection signal output from the radio wave sensor 24 and taken into the input port 622a via the proximity I / F 621a. It is determined whether or not (step A3701). When the radio wave sensor is on (result of step A3701 is “Y”), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step A3702).

  Further, the game control device 600 prepares a radio wave fraud notification command (step A3703), and sets a radio wave fraud occurrence flag as a radio wave fraud flag (step A3704).

  On the other hand, when the radio wave sensor is not on (the result of step A3701 is “N”), that is, when no abnormal radio wave is detected, the game control device 600 determines the radio wave fraud notification that defines the radio wave fraud notification time. If the timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step A3705). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to zero.

  Then, game control device 600 determines whether or not the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is 0 (step A3706). If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not 0 (the result of step A3706 is “N”), that is, if the time is not up, the radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated.

  On the other hand, the game control device 600 is in the case where the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is 0 (the result of step A3706 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, When the period has expired or when unauthorized reporting has not been performed from the beginning, a command for terminating unauthorized radio notification is prepared (step A3707), and a radio fraud cancel flag is set as a radio fraud flag (step A3708).

  When the radio fraud flag is set in the process of step A3704 or step A3708, the game control device 600 determines whether or not the prepared radio fraud flag matches the value of the radio fraud flag area (step A3709). That is, in the case of radio wave fraud, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

  When the prepared radio fraud flag matches the value of the radio fraud flag area (the result of step A3709 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 600 ends the radio fraud monitoring process. On the other hand, if the values do not match (the result of step A3709 is “N”), the prepared radio fraud flag is saved in the radio fraud flag area (step A3710), and command setting processing is executed (step A3711). Thereafter, the radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated.

  The above is description of the process performed with the game control apparatus 600 (main board | substrate). Next, the effect control executed based on the command received from the game control device 600 will be described. The effect control is executed by the effect control device 700 (sub board).

[1st CPU main processing (production control device)]
First, details of the main process executed by the effect control device 700 will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of 1st main processing that is executed by the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 710 of the presentation control device 700 according to the first embodiment of this invention. The main process is executed when the gaming machine 1 is turned on.

  First, the main control microcomputer 710 prohibits interruption (step B1001). Next, various initialization processes are executed (step B1003). Specifically, the RAM 711 as a work area is cleared to 0, and CPU initialization processing is executed. Further, initial values necessary for executing various processes are set in the RAM 711 and a random number initialization process is executed.

  Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 activates various interrupt timers for generating an interrupt at a predetermined timing (for example, 1 millisecond) (step B1003) and permits the interrupt (step B1004). Interrupt processing such as receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 600 at the occurrence timing of the interrupt is executed. Details of the interrupt processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The main control microcomputer 710 clears WDT (watchdog timer) (step B1005). The WDT is activated by the CPU initialization process included in the above-described initialization process, and monitors whether the CPU is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared after a certain period, the WDT times out and the CPU is reset.

  Then, the main control microcomputer 710 detects the operation signal of the effect button 17 (selection button 29) by the player, and executes effect button input processing for generating the detected signal (input information) (step B1006). Also, a game control command analysis process for analyzing and specifying the game control command received from the game control device 600 is executed (step B1007). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the command has been correctly received in the reception buffer by the interruption, and if it is received, the command is classified for use in the 1st scene control process (step B1009) or the like. To do.

  Next, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a test mode process (step B1008). In the test mode process, an inspection command is received at the time of inspection at the time of shipment from the factory, and LED lighting or the like is inspected. Therefore, the test mode process is executed when the CPU is inspected at the time of factory shipment. If processing such as display, sound output, and light emission is actually required, sound control processing (step B1012), decoration control processing (step B1013), and motor / solenoid (SOL) control processing (step B1014) described later are performed. ) Is processed.

  Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 displays a scene to be displayed on the variable display device (hereinafter “main display device”) 35 or the sub display device 480 based on the control command analyzed in the game control command analysis process (step B1007). A 1st scene control process for controlling (display contents) is executed (step B1009). In the 1st scene control process, a scene related to the progress of the game is controlled. Details of the 1st scene control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a gaming machine error monitoring process for monitoring the occurrence of an abnormality in the gaming machine 1 (step B1010). In addition to the abnormality relating to the effect control device 700, when a command for instructing error notification is received from the game control device 600, predetermined processing such as light emission of the notification LED, screen display, and alarm sound output is executed. The actual notification is executed by a sound control process (step B1012), a decoration control process (step B1013), and a motor / solenoid (SOL) control process (step B1014) described later.

  Then, the main control microcomputer 710 edits the command transmitted to the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 720, and executes an effect command editing process for writing to a predetermined register (step B1011).

  The main control microcomputer 710 executes sound control processing for controlling sound output from the speaker 10 (step B1012). In addition, decoration control processing for controlling decoration devices such as LEDs (board decoration device 101, frame decoration device 181) is executed (step B1013), and effects such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid, movable illumination, etc. A motor / SOL control process for controlling the devices (the board effect device 102 and the frame effect device 182) is executed (step B1014).

  Finally, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a random number update process for updating a random number such as a production random number (step B1015), and returns to the process of step B1005. Thereafter, the processing from step B1005 to step B1015 is repeated.

[Interrupt processing (production control device)]
Next, interrupt processing executed at predetermined intervals by the timer will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an interrupt processing procedure in the effect control device 700 according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

  The effect control device 700 first executes timer update processing for updating various timer values (step B1101).

  Subsequently, the effect control apparatus 700 monitors an external signal input and executes an input process for receiving the input (step B1102). For example, a signal input by operating the effect button 17 is detected, and the input of the signal is accepted.

  Further, the effect control device 700 outputs the image instructed by the first scene control processing display control processing (step B1009 in FIG. 77) from the main display device 35, or instructed by the sound control processing (step B1012 in FIG. 77). An output process for outputting the sound effect or the notification sound to the speaker 10 is executed (step B1103).

  Finally, the effect control device 700 monitors the input of the main command transmitted from the game control device 600, executes a main command reception process for receiving the main command (step B1104), and ends the interrupt process.

[2nd CPU main processing (production control device)]
Next, details of the other main process executed by the effect control device 700 will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of 2nd main processing executed by the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 720 of the effect control device 700 according to the first embodiment of this invention. The 2nd main process is executed when the gaming machine 1 is powered on.

  The video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 720 first executes a CPU initialization process (step B1201). Then, the RAM 721 as a work area is cleared to 0 (step B1202), and initial values necessary for executing various processes are set in the RAM 721 (step B1203). Then, a VDP initialization process for initializing a graphic processor that performs image processing is executed (step B1204). Next, various interrupts such as a V blank interrupt are permitted (step B1205).

  Further, the video control microcomputer 720 executes an initialization process of various control processes (step B1206). In the initialization process of various control processes, initialization of variables used in each control process to be described later is performed. For example, the background of the video displayed on the main display device 35 (or the sub display device 480) is initialized or the arrangement of symbols is initialized. Then, screen drawing of the main display device 35 (or the sub display device 480) is permitted (step B1207).

  Thereafter, the video control microcomputer 720 clears (initializes) the system cycle wait flag (step B1208), and waits until the system cycle wait flag is set to 1 (step B1209).

  When the system cycle wait flag is set to 1 (the result of step B1209 is “Y”), the video control microcomputer 720 determines whether the video control microcomputer 720 is operating normally (WDT ( The watchdog timer is cleared (step B1210). Note that if a predetermined time elapses without clearing the WDT, the video control microcomputer 720 is reset.

  Subsequently, the video control microcomputer 720 executes a received command check process (step B1211). In the received command check process, a command transmitted from the game control device 600 and received via the main control microcomputer 710 is identified and classified according to a process to be executed thereafter.

  Next, the video control microcomputer 720 executes a 2nd scene control process for determining the content to be displayed on the main display device 35 (or the sub display device 480) (step B1212). Specifically, in the 2nd scene control process, a notice character or the like is set, or the priority order of characters to be displayed is determined.

  Next, the video control microcomputer 720 executes background processing for performing background display according to the gaming state and the reach scene (step B1213). Subsequently, a variable display process for performing display control related to the variable display is executed (step B1214). Furthermore, a hold display process for performing a hold display based on the hold effect information stored in the prefetch storage area in the prefetch command receiving process described above is executed (step B1215).

  Next, the video control microcomputer 720 executes a customer waiting demo process for setting a customer waiting demo background after a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) has elapsed since receiving the customer waiting demo command (step B1216).

  Finally, the video control microcomputer 720 transfers the data stored in the image ROM 557 to the RAM, and executes display system processing for actual display on the main display device 35 (or sub display device 480) (step B1217). The process returns to step B1208. Thereafter, the processing from step B1208 to step B1217 is repeated.

[1st scene control processing]
Next, details of the 1st scene control process (step B1009) in the 1st main process described above will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the 1st scene control process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the gaming machine 1 is in the testing mode (step B1301). In the test mode (the result of step B1301 is “Y”), the 1st scene control process is terminated.

  When the gaming machine 1 is not in the testing mode (the result of Step B1301 is “N”), the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the scene change command transmitted from the gaming control device 600 has been received. (Step B1302). If the scene change command has not been received (the result of step B1302 is “N”), the processing after step B1307 is executed.

  When the main control microcomputer 710 has received the scene change command (the result of step B1302 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 acquires the updated (current) gaming state (step B1303). Further, it is determined whether or not a valid command has been received (step B1304). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the change destination scene matches the current gaming state. If the main control microcomputer 710 has not received a valid command (the result of step B1304 is “N”), the main control microcomputer 710 executes the processing after step B1307.

  When the main control microcomputer 710 receives a valid command (the result of step B1304 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 saves the received command in the memory (step B1305). Furthermore, an effect request flag is set (step B1306). The effect request flag is a flag indicating that it is time to change the scene, and a process according to whether or not the effect request flag is set is executed in the changing process (step B1311) described later.

  Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 executes processing corresponding to the received command identifier (step B1307).

  When the received command is a “power-on command”, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a power-on process (step B1308). In the power-on process, the screen displayed when the gaming machine 1 is powered on is controlled.

  When the received command is a “power failure recovery command”, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a power failure recovery process (step B1309). In the power failure recovery process, the screen displayed when the gaming machine 1 recovers from the power failure is controlled. If the customer is in a waiting state when a power failure occurs, a customer waiting process is executed.

  When the received command is a “customer waiting demo command”, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a customer waiting process (step B1310). In the customer waiting process, the screen displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the last execution of the variable display game is controlled. Details of the customer waiting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the received command is a “fluctuation pattern command”, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a changing process (step B1311). In the changing process, information necessary for displaying a scene corresponding to the set change pattern is acquired, and effect control corresponding to the set change pattern is performed. Details of the changing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the received command is a “symbol stop command”, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a symbol stop process (step B1312). In the symbol stop process, the variable display is stopped at the specified identification symbol.

  When the received command is a “round determination start command”, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a big hit round determining process (step B1313). In the big hit round determining process, the result of the variable display game is the second special result big hit, and a process for selecting the big hit round number is performed. Details of the big hit round determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the received command is the “fanfare command”, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a big hit fanfare process (step B1314). In the big hit fanfare process, a fanfare corresponding to the generated big hit is output.

  When the received command is the “large open / closed nth command”, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a process during the big hit round (step B1315). In the big hit round process, effect control during each round in the special game state is performed.

  When the received command is an “interval command”, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a big hit interval process (step B1316). In the big hit interval process, effect control between rounds in the special gaming state is performed.

  When the received command is an “ending command”, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a big hit ending process (step B1317). In the big hit ending process, effect control is performed when the special gaming state ends.

  When the execution of the processing based on each command is completed, the main control microcomputer 710 executes the pending number command reception processing (step B1318). The hold number command is a command for notifying the updated hold number, and the hold number command receiving process updates the hold display and the like based on the received hold number.

  Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a decoration special figure command reception process (step B1319). The decoration special figure command reception process is a process of receiving a special decoration figure command transmitted prior to the fluctuation pattern command at the start of fluctuation.

  Next, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a prior determination command reception process (step B1320). The prior determination command receiving process is a process of setting a hold display effect or the like based on a prior effect design command including a fall, promotion, and fall promotion, and a prior effect change command.

  Next, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a probability information command reception process (step B1321). The probability information command reception process is a process for setting a gaming state such as an internal probability based on the received probability information command. The probability information command includes, for example, a high accuracy / short time command, a low accuracy / short time command, a low accuracy / no support command, and the like.

  Next, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a right-handed warning command reception process (step B1322). The right-handed warning command receiving process is a process for displaying a warning on the main display device 35, the sub-display device 480, etc., when the player makes a right-hand shot at a time other than the right-handed timing such as when a big hit round is determined is there. Details of the right-handed warning command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the right-handed warning command reception process ends, the 1st scene control process ends and the process returns to the 1st main process.

  Next, the display of the main display device 35 and the sub display device 480 will be described.

[Screen display (Main display device / Sub display device)]
FIGS. 81A and 81B are diagrams showing examples of display contents of the main display device 35 and the sub display device 480 according to the first embodiment of the present invention, where FIG. 81A shows a customer waiting state and FIG. 81B shows a state other than the customer waiting state. Is shown.

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as shown in (A), only the minimum display is performed on the main display device 35 in order to reduce power consumption when waiting for a customer. Yes (energy saving mode). For example, a display that indicates that the display screen brightness is minimized to reduce power consumption (“Energy Saving”) and a display that indicates how to return to the normal screen (“Return by touching the handle or operating a button” ”).

  At this time, on the sub display device 480, a demonstration display including a customer waiting demonstration image (video), model information (model name, jackpot probability, probability variation ratio, etc.) and the like is performed. When returning from the energy saving mode, a demo display (a customer waiting demo image) may be output to the main display device 35. At this time, the sub display device 480 may display only model information, or may display an image different from the main display device 35. Even in the energy saving mode, the sub display device 480 is not turned off. However, since the screen size is smaller than that of the main display device 35, power consumption can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in (B), when the variable display game is being executed in a state other than the customer waiting state, for example, the identification symbol (left ornament symbol, middle ornament symbol, right ornament symbol) is variably displayed. At this time, the middle decoration symbol may be displayed smaller than the other identification symbols (left decoration symbol, right decoration symbol).

  An effect display when a reach occurs and an error display when an error occurs are also performed. In the lower part of the main display screen, a storage display area for displaying the start memory shown in FIG. 1 and FIG.

  At this time, in the sub display device 480, an auxiliary effect (display of an auxiliary effect image and a preview image) of the content displayed on the main display device 35 is performed. In addition, the start memory number is displayed, and the usual figure change display game is executed. Note that the variable display game that is normally executed on the main display device 35 may be executed on the sub display device 480 instead of the main display device 35 when a predetermined condition is satisfied, or the main display device 35 and the sub display device. The variable display game may be executed on both of the screens 480.

[Screen display (sub display device)]
Next, details of the sub display device 480 will be described. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a configuration of the sub display device 480 according to the first embodiment of the present invention, in which (A) is a display screen of the sub display device 480, (B) is a general game auxiliary display area, C) shows a state display symbol (fourth symbol) in the special figure variation display game.

  As shown in (A), on the screen of the sub display device 480, a general game auxiliary display area 482 is arranged in the upper right part, and a special game auxiliary display area 483 is arranged in the lower part. The general game auxiliary display area 482 and the special game auxiliary display area 483 are invariable display areas with fixed display positions. Note that the invariant display area may be hidden during the customer waiting demonstration, or the display may be continued as it is.

  In the general game auxiliary display area 482, as shown in (B), the start memory number of the general variable display game is displayed on the right side, and the result of the general variable display game is displayed on the left side. The starting memory number of the usual map display game is displayed as a numerical value, but may be displayed in other modes. The result of the usual map display game is represented by “O” or “X”, but may be in other modes. During the execution of the usual variable display game, “◯” and “×” are displayed in a variable manner.

  The special figure game auxiliary display area 483 includes a special 1 game state display area 484a, a special 1 memory number display area 485a, a special 2 game state display area 484b, and a special 2 memory number display area 485b.

  In the special 1 game state display area 484a, a state display symbol (fourth symbol) in the special figure 1 variable display game is displayed. In addition, the special memory number display area 485a displays the start memory number for executing the special figure 1 variable display game. Similarly, in the special 2 game state display area 484b, a state display symbol (fourth symbol) in the special figure 2 variable display game is displayed. In the special 2 memory number display area 485b, the start memory number for executing the special figure 2 variable display game is displayed.

  Since the start memory numbers displayed in the special 1 memory number display area 485a and the special 2 memory number display area 485b are displayed as numbers, no pre-reading display is performed.

  The state display symbols (fourth symbol) displayed in the special 1 game state display region 484a and the special 2 game state display region 484b are changed and stopped in parallel with at least the decorative symbols, so that the progress of the decorative symbol variation display game is progressed. In this embodiment, it is also a symbol for deriving the result of the decorative symbol variation display game together with the decorative symbol (left, middle, right). For example, it is possible to discriminate between small hits and two round big hits that have similar appearance at the time of occurrence of hits by the same decorative symbol combination based on the fourth symbols.

  In the variation display of the state display symbol (fourth symbol), as shown in (C), the displayed color is variable. Specifically, the display changes in the order of “white” → “blue” → “green” → “yellow” → “orange” → “red” → “white”.

  Note that the sub display device 480 is not shielded by another movable accessory or the like regardless of whether or not the upper effect device 400 is operating, so that the general game auxiliary display area 482 and the special game auxiliary display are not displayed. The area 483 (the fourth symbol display area 484 and the stored number display area 485 in the special figures 1 and 2) is always visible.

[Waiting for customers]
Next, details of the customer waiting process (step B1310) in the first scene control process described above will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of customer waiting processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not a customer waiting demo is being executed (step B1401). If the customer waiting demonstration is not being executed (the result of step B1401 is “N”), it is determined whether or not a customer waiting start flag is set (step B1402). If the customer waiting start flag is not set (the result of step B1402 is “N”), a customer waiting start timer is set (step B1403), and further a customer waiting start flag is set (step B1404).

  The main control microcomputer 710 waits for the customer when the customer waiting start flag is set (step B1404) or when the customer waiting start flag is already set (the result of step B1402 is “Y”). If the start timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step B1405). Then, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting start timer is 0 (step B1406).

  When the start timer reaches 0 (the result of step B1406 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 executes customer waiting demo setting processing to start the customer waiting demo (step B1407). Further, each waiting demonstration start flag is reset (step B1408), and a setting cancellation timer for canceling the customer waiting demonstration is set (step B1409). When the customer waiting demonstration setting process is executed, a selection screen for the firing notification mode is displayed automatically or by the player's operation.

  When the setting release timer has been set or the customer waiting demo has already started (the result of step B1401 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 determines that the release timer is not 0— 1 is updated (step B1410). Then, it is determined whether or not the release timer is 0 (step B1411).

  When the setting cancellation timer is 0 (the result of step B1411 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 resets the notification mode set flag (step B1412), and resets the firing notification mode setting (step B1412). B1413). In addition, when the setting of the firing notification mode is reset, the setting is made to notify the timing of each of the fixed side and the variable side.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to select a firing notification mode for assisting in selecting whether to fix the number of big hit rounds or change (lottery) during execution of the customer waiting demonstration. . As described above, after the big hit occurs, the game ball is launched toward the sorting device 90 and passed through the variable side (first passing gate part 34g) or the fixed side (second passing gate part 34h), thereby hitting the big hit round. A number determination mode can be selected. In this embodiment, it is possible to set the launch notification mode for notifying the opening timing of the gate during the customer waiting demonstration, and a method for setting the launch notification mode will be described below.

  When the selection screen for the firing notification mode is displayed on the main display device 35, the main control microcomputer 710 first determines whether or not the firing notification mode is being selected (step B1414). If the firing notification mode is not selected (the result of step B1414 is “N”), it is determined whether or not there is a firing notification switching operation (step B1415). If there is no firing notification switching operation (the result of step B1415 is “Y”), the customer waiting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not there is an operation for selecting firing notification (step B1416). If there is a selection of firing notification (the result of step B1416 is “Y”), the firing notification mode corresponding to the selection operation is highlighted (step B1417).

  When there is no selection operation (the result of step B 1416 is “N”), or when the highlighting of the firing notification mode corresponding to the selection operation ends, the main control microcomputer 710 further determines the selected firing notification mode. It is determined whether or not there is an operation (step B1418). Furthermore, when there is no confirmation operation of the firing notification mode (the result of step B1418 is “N”), the customer waiting process is terminated.

  When there is a confirmation operation for the firing notification mode (the result of Step B1418 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 sets a firing notification mode corresponding to the confirmation operation (Step B1419). Further, the notification mode set flag is saved (step B1420), and a confirmation screen is displayed for a predetermined time (step B1421). Thereafter, the customer waiting process is terminated. The selection of the firing notification mode will be described in more detail later with reference to the firing notification mode setting process (FIG. 97) and the setting screen (FIGS. 103 and 104).

[Fluctuation processing]
Next, details of the changing process (step B1311) in the first scene control process described above will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the changing process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not an effect request flag is set (step B1501). When the effect request flag is set (the result of step B1501 is “Y”), various information is set.

  Specifically, the main control microcomputer 710 first clears PB (push button) information (step B1502). The PB (push button) information is input information by the effect button 17.

  Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 sets a movable body request (step B1503). That is, the operation mode of the movable illumination or the electric accessory is set according to the contents of the production.

  Furthermore, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a variation effect pattern setting process (step B1504). In the variation effect pattern setting process, a stop symbol of the special figure variation display game is set, or a variation time and a notice effect are set based on the variation pattern command.

  Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 executes an accessory effect operation setting process (step B1505). The accessory effect operation setting process is a process of setting an effect device that performs an effect corresponding to the variation pattern and the content (effect mode) of the effect operation by the effect device. Based on the effect mode set in the accessory effect operation setting process, the rear effect operation control process (step B1513), the lower effect operation control process (step B1514), the upper effect operation control process (step B1515), and the right described later. A section effect operation control process (step B1516) is executed.

  Next, the main control microcomputer 710 executes random number seed initialization processing (step B1506). The random number seed initialization process is a process for initializing a random number seed used for determining the contents of the production.

  Further, the main control microcomputer 710 sets a scene sequence table corresponding to the set variation pattern (step B1507). Thereafter, a variable time setting process for setting the variable time is executed (step B1508). Then, the first scene is set, and a scene update timer is set (step B1509). Finally, the effect request flag is cleared (step B1510), and the changing process ends.

  On the other hand, when the effect request flag is not set (the result of step B1501 is “N”), the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the scene update timer has become 0 (step B1511). When the scene update timer reaches 0 (the result of step B1511 is “Y”), that is, in the case of scene switching timing, the next scene data set in the scene sequence table is set (step B1512).

  Furthermore, the main control microcomputer 710 operates various movable accessories (direction devices) corresponding to the scene. Specifically, the back side production operation control process (step B1513), the bottom production operation control process (step B1514), the top production operation control process (step B1515), and the right part production operation control process (step B1516) are executed. .

  Here, the effect aspect regarding various movable accessories is demonstrated. The specific contents of the back side production operation will be further described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 87, and the upper production operation will be further described with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89. The details of the right portion effect operation control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 90, and the right portion effect operation will be further described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94.

[Back side production device]
FIGS. 85A and 85B are views of the back side production apparatus 300 according to the first embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the upper right side, in which FIG. 85A shows a state before the shutter unit 330 slides, and FIG. 85B shows the shutter unit 330. The state during the slide operation is shown. FIGS. 86A and 86B are views of the operation of the back side production apparatus 300 according to the first embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front, where FIG. 86A shows a state before the turning door 340 is turned, and FIG. The state after the moving door 340 rotates is shown.

  Referring to FIG. 85 (A), when the center case 34 is viewed from above, the upper surface wall 222b of the cover member 222 is decorated with characters. In addition, a movable decorative member 223 is disposed between the upper surface walls 222b so as to overlap the lower center of the main display device 35 from the front. Then, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), the shutter units 330 arranged on the left and right slide from the accommodation space toward the center of the main display device 35.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86A, the left and right shutter units 330 each move to a predetermined position. When the left and right shutter units 330 move to a predetermined position, the pivot door 340 becomes pivotable. The pivot door 340 can be pivoted independently of the operation of the shutter unit 330.

  A gap is provided between the lower protrusions 330b of the left and right shutter units 330 in order to prevent damage due to contact or the like. In this case, the gap cannot be visually recognized from the player who is playing the game, regardless of whether or not the effect by the movable decorative member 223 is being executed. The effect by the movable decorative member 223 (lower effect device 220) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, a partition area is formed by the left and right shutter units 330 until the rotation door 340 provided in the left and right shutter units 330 rotates, and the display by the main display device 35 can be visually recognized. Yes. At this time, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), the identification symbol displayed on the main display device 35 is reduced and displayed so as to be visible to the player, and a reach effect image is further displayed. Also, there is an area where the display by the main display device 35 can be visually recognized outside the left and right shutter units 330, and an effect image (external effect image) is also displayed in this area.

  Thereafter, the left and right pivot doors 340 are pivoted to shield the central portion of the main display device 35. On the back side of the revolving door 340, the left and right revolving doors 340 come close to each other so as to have a design (design). In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86 (B), a “decision” character decoration is derived. At this time, a magnetic body 344 is accommodated on the facing side of the left and right turning doors 340, and the left and right turning doors 340 are configured to maintain a combined state in which they are close by magnetic force.

  Further, one of the magnetic bodies that are provided in the rotating door 340 and adsorb to each other is a hard magnetic body and the other is a soft magnetic body. For example, the right rotating door 340 has a hard magnetic body on the upper side and a soft magnetic body on the lower side, and the left rotating door 340 has a soft magnetic body on the upper side and a hard magnetic body on the lower side. Thereby, compared with the case where a hard magnetic body is disposed on one of the pivot doors 340 and a soft magnetic body is disposed on the other pivot door 340, the positional deviation occurs when the left and right pivot doors 340 are combined. It becomes difficult to occur. Note that both of the magnets housed in the left and right pivot doors 340 may be hard magnetic materials.

[Lower production device]
87A and 87B are diagrams for explaining the lower effect device 220 according to the first embodiment of the present invention, in which FIG. 87A is a view of the movable decorative member 223 before operation, and FIG. 87B is movable. The figure which looked at the state after operation | movement of the decoration member 223 from the front is shown.

  Referring to (A), as described above, the movable decorative member 223 is arranged so as to cover the gap between the lower protrusions 330b of the left and right shutter units 330 from the front so that the player cannot visually recognize them. Accordingly, the left and right shutter units 330 can actually appear to be combined (contacted) even though they are not actually combined (contacted). It is possible to enhance the effect while preventing damage to the portion 330b. The movable decorative member 223 may be moved when the shutter unit 330 is slid, or may be operated alone. Also, the upper protrusions 330a of the left and right shutter units 330 may be made difficult to visually recognize the gap with a decorative member such as the movable decorative member 223, like the lower protrusion 330b.

  As shown in (B), when the movable decorative member 223 is moved upward, the entire decorative body 224 becomes visible to the player. Even in this case, as described above, the movable decorative member 223 prevents the player from visually recognizing the gap between the lower protrusions 330b of the left and right shutter units 330. In addition, about the member which shields the clearance gap between the upper side protrusion part 330a and the lower side protrusion part 330b so that visual recognition is difficult, it is good also as a non-movable decoration member.

[Upper production device]
FIG. 88 is a diagram showing the main display device 35 and the sub display device 480 from the start of the variable display game to the temporary stop in the first embodiment of the present invention.

  When the variable display game is started and the degree of expectation of being a big hit (special result mode) is high, a notice effect image is displayed on the sub display device 480 as shown in FIG. It should be noted that the degree of expectation is higher when the notice effect image is displayed than when the notice effect image is not displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in (B), an auxiliary effect image is displayed on the sub display device 480, and reach occurs. The auxiliary effect image may correspond to the notice effect, or may be an independent image corresponding to the degree of expectation or the like.

  Then, as shown in (C), when the identification symbol is temporarily stopped, an operation sign image is displayed on the sub display device 480. When the motion sign image is displayed, the effect is executed in a manner that suggests the start (development) of the operation of the sub display device 480, such as the upper effect device 400 vibrating up and down. Although the identification symbol may stop from the temporary stop state shown in (C), if it develops, the temporary stop of the symbol continues and the effect shown in FIG. 89 is executed.

  FIG. 89 is a diagram showing an example of the development effect executed by the upper effect device 400 after the variable display game is temporarily stopped in the first embodiment of the present invention.

  Referring to (A), the start of the development effect is displayed in the variable display area 481 of the sub display device 480, and the upper effect device 400 performs the descending operation. Thereafter, as shown in (B), the upper effect device 400 operates so as to vibrate up and down, and an effect corresponding to the degree of expectation that is a big hit (special result mode) is executed.

  Referring to (C), a message indicating that the degree of expectation to be a big hit (special result mode) is medium (“Ikuzo!”) Is displayed, and thereafter, the ascending operation of the upper effect device is executed. . And as shown to (D), the production | presentation which shows that the expectation degree which becomes a big hit (special result aspect) is medium is performed.

  Referring to (E), the variable display area 481 is in a transmissive state, and a light-emitting effect is executed by the light guide plate 470 located at the rear, whereby a message indicating that the degree of expectation that is a big hit (special result mode) is large ( "Large chance !!!!") is displayed. Then, the ascending operation of the upper effect device is executed, and as shown in (F), an effect indicating that the degree of expectation to be a big hit (special result mode) is large. By executing such an effect, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation for the big hit, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Right production device]
Next, the details of the right effect operation control process (step B1516) in the above-described changing process will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of right portion effect operation control processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not it is set to execute the right effect operation in the accessory effect operation setting process (step B1505) (step B7001). If it is not set to execute the right effect operation (the result of step B7001 is “N”), the right effect operation control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the main control microcomputer 710 is set to execute the right effect operation (the result of Step B7001 is “Y”), it determines whether or not it is the effect start timing (Step B7002). ). When it is not the production start timing (the result of Step B7002 is “N”), the processing after Step B7006 is executed.

  When it is the production start timing (the result of Step B7002 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 sets the moving operation of the movable decorative unit 550 (Step B7003). Further, a hand-holding effect image is displayed on the main display device 35 (step B7004). The hand-holding effect image is an image for explaining an effect using an infrared sensor (hereinafter, referred to as “human sensor”) 590 provided in the movable decoration unit 550, as shown in FIG. Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 sets the maximum rotation speed of the rotating cylinder 580 according to the reliability that is a big hit (step B7005).

  Next, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the human sensor 590 is valid (human detection period) (step B7006). If it is during the human detection period (the result of step B7006 is “Y”), the hand holding effect image is updated (step B7007). In the updated hand holding effect image, for example, as shown in FIG. 92, a more specific operation is explained, or the remaining time is displayed as shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not human detection has been performed (step B7008). When human detection is made (the result of step B7008 is “Y”), if the rotating cylinder 580 has not reached the maximum rotating speed, the rotating speed of the rotating cylinder 580 is increased (step B7009).

  The main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not it is the production end timing (step B7010). If it is not the production end timing (the result of step B7010 is “N”), the right portion production operation control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the case of the production end timing (the result of step B7010 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 stops the rotation of the rotating cylinder 580 and sets the return operation of the movable decorative unit 550 (step B7011). 94, an effect result image is displayed on the main display device 35 (step B7012).

  FIGS. 91 to 94 are diagrams for explaining the aspect of the right portion effect operation according to the first embodiment of this invention. An effect (“hand holding chance” effect) by the right effect device 500 is executed when a reach occurs. When the “hand-holding chance” effect is being executed, the identification symbol is variably displayed in a reduced state in the upper right part of the main display device 35.

  As shown in FIG. 91, when the “hand-holding chance” effect is started, first, the contents of the “hand-holding chance” effect and an explanation of the operation are displayed. At this time, the right part production device 500 moves toward the center of the game board.

  Further, in the “hand-holding chance” effect, the player can rotate the rotating cylinder 580 by shaking his / her hand in front of the rotating cylinder 580 provided in the right direction producing device 500 and detecting it by the human sensor 590. it can. Further, the rotating cylinder 580 is configured to rotate at a high speed in accordance with the speed and number of times of waving.

  As shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, when the right part production device 500 moves to the center of the game board and reaches a predetermined position, the explanation display unit appears after the right part production device 500 moves. In addition, a display suggesting the position where the hand is held (the detection range of the human sensor 590) is made. Further, as shown in FIG. 93, the remaining time of the “hand-holding chance” effect is displayed on the main display device 35. The remaining time may be displayed on the sub display device 480.

  When the “hand-holding chance” effect is timed up, as shown in FIG. 94A, information indicating the degree of expectation (“It ’s super hot!”) Is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94B, the development effect is executed. By executing such an effect, the player actively participates in the game, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Processing during big hit round decision]
Next, details of the big hit round determination process (step B1313) in the first scene control process described above will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the big hit round determining process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not a round determination start command has been received (step B7101). If the round decision start command has not been received (the result of step B7101 is “N”), the processing after step B7106 is executed.

  On the other hand, when receiving the round determination start command (the result of Step B7101 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 sets the descending operation of the sub display device 480 (Step B7102). Further, a firing stop suggestion image is displayed on the sub display device 480 (step B7103). As shown in FIG. 101 (B), the sub display device 480 is lowered, and the sub display device 480 displays a firing stop suggestion image including a message that suggests stopping the firing temporarily. Further, a message for explaining the game is displayed on the main display device 35. Thereafter, the game description is continued on the main display device 35 (FIG. 102).

  Further, the main control microcomputer 710 outputs a firing stop suggesting voice (step B7104), and sets “1” as the process number in the big hit round determination process (step B7105).

  Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not a distribution state command has been received (step B7106). When the distribution state command is received (the result of Step B7106 is “Y”), the distribution state notification corresponding to the received distribution state command is executed (Step B7107). In the distribution state notification, for example, the lens members 61 and 63 corresponding to the received distribution state are caused to emit light.

  Next, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a process corresponding to the process number (step B7108). When the process number is “1”, a round determination method explanation process for explaining a game for determining the big hit round is executed (step B7109). Details of the round determination method explanation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process number is “2”, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a firing notification mode setting process for notifying the firing timing for determining whether to change or fix the big hit round (step B7110). . Details of the firing notification mode setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process number is “3”, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a firing timing notifying process for notifying the firing timing corresponding to the jackpot round determination method set by the player (step B7111). Details of the firing timing notification process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not a round number determination command has been received (step B7112). If the round number determination command has not been received (the result of step B7112 is “N”), the big hit round determining process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the main control microcomputer 710 receives a round number determination command notifying that the number of rounds has been determined (the result of step B7112 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 generates a gate passing sound corresponding to the round number determination command. Output (step B7113). As shown in FIG. 99, the gate passing sound corresponding to the round number determination command is, for example, “Zukuon!” For 15 rounds, “Pushu!” For 5 rounds, and “Chakeen!” For 10 rounds. Different notification sounds are set as shown in FIG.

  Further, the main control microcomputer 710 displays a round finalized image corresponding to the finalized round on the main display device 35 (step B7114). Furthermore, a round final image corresponding to the final round is displayed on the sub display device 480 (step B7115). Thereafter, in order to return the descending sub display device 480 to its original state, an ascending operation is set (step B 7116), and the distribution state notification is stopped (step B 7117). Thereafter, the big hit round determining process is terminated.

[Round decision method explanation process]
Next, details of the round determination method explanation processing (step B7109) in the big hit round determination processing described above will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the round determination method explanation processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the update timer has been set (step B7201). The update timer is a timer for managing the time for outputting the round determination method to the main display device 35. When the update timer has been set (the result of step B7201 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 executes the processing after step B7207.

  If the update timer has not been set (the result of Step B7201 is “N”), the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the first hit in the non-electric support state (whether or not the explanation display condition is satisfied). Determination is made (step B7202). In the case of the first hit in the non-electric support state (the result of step B7202 is “Y”), that is, in the case of the first big hit after the start of the game in the non-electric support state, details of the round determination method are displayed on the main display device 35. An explanation image is displayed (step B7203). Then, a detailed explanation update timer is set (step B7204).

  On the other hand, if the main control microcomputer 710 is not the first hit in the non-electric support state (the result of step B7202 is “N”), that is, if a big hit has already occurred since the start of the game, the round determination method has already been performed. Is displayed, a simple explanation image of the round determination method is displayed on the main display device 35 (step B7205). Then, a simple explanation update timer is set (step B7206).

  When the update timer has already been set (the result of step B7201 is “Y”), when the process of step B7206 or step B7206 is completed, the main control microcomputer 710 subsequently determines that the update timer is not 0− 1 is updated (step B7207). Furthermore, it is determined whether or not the update timer has reached 0 (step B7208).

  If the update timer is not 0 (the result of Step B7208 is “N”), the main control microcomputer 710 updates the description image according to the timer value of the update timer (Step B7209). On the other hand, when the update timer reaches 0 (the result of step B7208 is “Y”), the process number is set to “2” (step B7210). Thereafter, the round determination method explanation processing ends.

[Launch mode setting process]
Next, the details of the firing mode setting process (step B7110) in the big hit round determining process will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the launch mode setting process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not there is a notification mode set flag (step B7301). The notification mode set flag is set when the player has already determined whether the method for determining the big hit round is variable or fixed. If there is a notification mode set flag (the result of step B7301 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 sets the process number to “3” (step B7311) and ends the firing mode setting process.

  If there is no notification mode setting flag (the result of step B7301 is “N”), the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether the setting screen has been displayed (step B7302). If it has not been displayed (the result of step B7302 is “Y”), a firing notification mode setting screen is displayed (step B7303).

  Furthermore, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not there is an operation for selecting a firing notification mode on the firing notification mode setting screen (step B7304). When there is an operation for selecting the firing notification mode (the result of step B7304 is “Y”), the firing notification mode corresponding to the selection operation is highlighted (step B7305).

  Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not there is an operation for confirming the selected firing notification mode (step B7306). If there is no confirmation operation for the selected firing notification mode (the result of step B7306 is “N”), the firing mode setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when there is a confirmation operation for the selected firing notification mode (the result of Step B7306 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 sets a firing notification mode corresponding to the confirmation operation (Step B7307). The notification mode set flag is saved (step B7308). Further, a setting confirmation screen is displayed on the main display device 35 (step B7309), and a guidance display screen is displayed on the sub display device 480 (step B7310). Thereafter, the process number is set to “3” (step B7311), and the firing mode setting process is terminated.

[Launch Timing Notification Process]
Next, details of the firing timing notification process (step B7111) in the big hit round determination process described above will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the round determination method explanation processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the main control microcomputer 710 checks the setting of the firing notification mode (step B7401). Then, it is determined whether or not the set launch notification mode is a default (both (variation, fixed) notification) setting (step B7402). If the set launch notification mode is the default setting (the result of step B7402 is “Y”), a state notification image corresponding to the distribution state command is displayed (step B7407). As shown in FIG. 100, when the distribution state command indicates the fluctuation side, a message such as “Now it is a variable gate!” Is displayed as the state notification image 1, and the distribution state command indicates the fixed side. In this case, a message such as “Now it is a fixed gate!” Is displayed as the status notification image 2.

  On the other hand, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the received distribution state command corresponds to the setting of the firing notification mode (steps B7403 and B7404). If the received distribution state command corresponds to the setting of the firing notification mode (the result of step B7404 is “Y”), a firing suggestion image is displayed on the sub display device 480 (step B7405). When the received distribution state command does not correspond to the setting of the firing notification mode (the result of Step B7404 is “N”), a firing standby suggestion image is displayed on the sub display device 480 (Step B7406). As shown in FIG. 100, when the received distribution state command corresponds to the setting of the firing notification mode, a message such as “Now hit it!” Is displayed as the firing suggestion image. When the minute state command does not correspond to the setting of the firing notification mode, a message such as “Stay still!” Is displayed as the firing standby suggestion image.

[Launch notification mode]
Here, the selection of the firing notification mode will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 101 and 102 explain the flow from the result of the (decoration) special figure variation display game according to the first embodiment of the present invention until the method of determining the big hit round after the second special result is presented. It is a figure to do. 103 and 104 are diagrams illustrating a procedure for selecting a fire notification mode for determining a big hit round according to the first embodiment of this invention. 105 and 106 are diagrams illustrating the flow from when the image indicating the firing notification timing according to the first embodiment of this invention is displayed until the game ball passes through the passing gate.

  FIG. 101 (A) shows a state where the second special result big hit (probability change, normal) in which a lottery for the big hit round is performed as a result of the variable display game. At this time, since the number of jackpot rounds has not been determined, the special gaming state has not started. Further, the sorting member (switching unit 93) of the sorting device 90 is switched between the fluctuation side and the fixed side at a predetermined time interval. As described above, the LED is lit (flashes) through the lens members 61 and 63 in response to switching of the distribution member (switching unit 93). Note that the switching of the sorting member (switching unit 93) of the sorting apparatus 90 is continuously switched between the variable side and the fixed side at a predetermined time interval other than when the big hit round is determined.

  Thereafter, as shown in (B), the upper effect device 400 moves down, and a message is displayed in the variable display area 481 of the sub display device 480 to temporarily stop the game ball. At this time, the main display device 35 displays a message to the effect that the game will be explained. As will be described later, since the sub display device 480 notifies the player to stop the release of the game ball, the player can be surely noticed by moving the upper effect device 400 (moving down).

  Further, as described above, the sub display device 480 is arranged in the vicinity of the sorting device 90 and in front of the main display device 35 so as not to overlap with the game description displayed on the main display device 35. By making it move, it is possible to effectively suppress the launch of the game ball toward the sorting device 90.

  FIG. 102 shows a state in which the description of the game for determining the big hit round is displayed on the main display device 35. At this time, the sub display device 480 continues to display a message indicating that the game ball is temporarily stopped from firing.

  In the present embodiment, the number of big hit rounds is determined by passing a game ball through a passing gate. Referring to FIG. 103, it is in a state for selecting any of the “fixed”, “lottery”, and “both” notification modes. The selection of the notification mode is selected by operating the selection button 29 and confirmed by operating the effect button 17. For example, as shown in FIG. 104 (A), by selecting “lottery” with the selection button 29 and operating the effect button 17, the firing notification mode is determined as shown in (B).

  The number of big hits will be further described. As shown in FIGS. 41B and 41C, “fixed” is selected by fixing 10 rounds, and “lottery” is selected by drawing either 5 rounds or 15 rounds. By clearly showing this in the main display device 35, it becomes possible for the player to understand the mode of determining the game value for each gate (specific area), and the game of determining the number of rounds (auxiliary game) is smooth. Can be achieved.

  Thus, since it can be set so that the player can select and notify the distribution state, any one of “fixed (first specific area)” and “lottery (second specific area)” is specified. It becomes easy to perform a game ball launching operation aiming at an area.

  The case where “lottery” is selected will be described. As shown in FIG. 105 (A), in the state where the switching unit 93 closes the variable side, a message (“Still wait” !! ”) is displayed. On the other hand, as shown in (B), in a state in which the switching unit 93 opens the variable side, a message for instructing firing (“Stay now!”) Is displayed on the sub display device 480. .

  In this way, since the timing of launching the game ball is notified at the timing of selecting the determination method of the jackpot round number designated by the player, it is assumed that the game ball is launched at a time different from the set launch timing. Can be prevented.

  Then, according to the notification, the game balls are fired, and as shown in FIG. 106 (A), the game balls are passed through the gate designated by the player, so that the lottery for the big hit round is performed. In (A), since the game ball has passed through the first passing gate portion 34g on the variable side, a lottery of the number of big hit rounds of 5 rounds or 15 rounds is performed. In (B), since 15 rounds with a large number of rounds are won, a message indicating that (“15R confirmed!”) Is displayed on the main display device 35, and a blessing message is displayed on the sub display device 480.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the number of jackpot rounds (special game state type) is determined against the player's intention while allowing the player to understand the contents of the auxiliary game for selecting the jackpot determination method. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of being lost.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the information regarding the auxiliary gaming state is displayed on the main display device 35, and the sub-display device 480 notifies the player to stop the release of the game ball so that the player can easily understand the information. Can be presented.

[Right-hand warning]
Next, the details of the right-handed warning command reception process (step B1322) in the first scene control process described above will be described. FIG. 107 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of right-handed warning command reception processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether a right-hand warning is being displayed (step B7501). If the right-hand warning is being displayed (the result of step B7501 is “Y”), the processing after step B7507 is executed.

  If the right-handed warning is not displayed (the result of Step B7501 is “N”), the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether a right-handed warning command has been received (Step B7502). If a right-handed warning command has not been received (the result of step B7502 is “N”), the right-handed warning command reception process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the right control warning command is received (the result of Step B7502 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the notice effect is being executed on the sub display device 480 (Step S7502). B7503). When the notice effect is being executed on the sub display device 480 (the result of step B7503 is “Y”), the right-handed warning command receiving process is terminated in order to prioritize the display of the notice effect.

  Note that a right-handed warning image may be displayed even when a notice effect is being executed. In this case, a reduced display is performed so as not to hinder the visual recognition of the displayed preview image.

  On the other hand, when the notice effect is not being executed on the sub display device 480 (the result of Step B7503 is “N”), the main control microcomputer 710 sets the descending operation of the sub display device 480 (Step B7504). At this time, when the variable display game is executed on the main display device 35, a right-handed warning image to be described later may be displayed at the initial position without lowering the sub display device 480.

  Also, the main control microcomputer 710 displays a right-handed warning image on the sub display device 480 (step B7505). The right-handed warning image may be a left-pointing suggestion image. Further, the main control microcomputer 710 sets a warning display timer (step B7506).

  Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 updates −1 if the display timer is not 0 (step B7507). Then, it is determined whether the display timer is 0, that is, whether the time is up (step B7508). If the display timer has not expired (the result of step B7508 is “N”), the right-handed warning command reception process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the display timer expires (the result of step B7508 is “Y”), main control microcomputer 710 sets the ascending operation to return sub display device 480 to the initial position (step B7509). . Furthermore, the right-handed warning image (left aiming suggestive image) of the sub display device is deleted (step B7510), and the right-handed warning command receiving process is terminated.

  FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining an example of a right-handed warning according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 108A is a diagram illustrating a first-pass gate 34g or a second-pass by performing a right-hand strike during a normal game. A state in which the game ball passes through the gate part 34h is shown, and (B) shows a state in which a right-handed warning is given.

  In a game in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, left-handed is performed except when the big hit round is determined. As shown in (A), when a game ball passes through the first passing gate portion 34g or the second passing gate portion 34h by making a right strike during a normal game, the game control device 600 makes a right strike to the effect control device 700. A warning command is sent.

  When receiving the right-handed warning command, the effect control device 700 lowers the sub-display device 480 as shown in (B), and the right-handed warning image (“fired to the left” is displayed in the variable display area 481 of the sub-display device 480. Please display "). At this time, when the variable display game is executed on the main display device 35, the right-handed warning image is displayed in the initial position without lowering the sub display device 480 as described above. Also good.

[Error monitoring]
Next, details of the gaming machine error monitoring process (step B1010) in the first main process described above will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gaming machine error monitoring process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a RAM initialization notification process (step B2001). The RAM initialization notifying process is a process for notifying that the RAM of the game control device 600 and the effect control device 700 has been initialized, such as at the time of activation.

  Next, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a frame opening sensor error notification process (step B2002). In the frame opening sensor error notification process, an error is notified while the glass frame 6 and the front frame 5 are opened, specifically, from when the frame opening command is received until the closing command is received. For error notification, a notification sound is output or the gaming state notification LED 12 is turned on. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112, an error occurs in the main display device 35, and an error type in the sub display device 480. (Error code) is displayed, and further, notification by sound from the speaker 10 is performed.

  In this way, by displaying an error on the main display device (first display device) 35 and the sub display device (second display device) 480, it is possible to improve the deterrent effect of an act that may be fraudulent. It becomes possible.

  Next, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a payout error notification process (step B2003). In the payout error notification process, an error generated in the payout control is notified based on the command transmitted from the payout control device 640.

  Next, the main control microcomputer 710 executes magnetic sensor error notification processing (step B2004). In the magnetic sensor error notification process, an error is notified based on a command transmitted from the game control device 600 based on the abnormality detected by the magnetic sensor 23.

  As shown in FIG. 111, the magnetic sensor 23 is disposed upstream of a gate (for example, a normal start gate 36) through which a game ball passes and a winning opening (for example, a starting winning opening 37, 38, a general winning opening 40). Is done. This is to detect fraud such as changing the trajectory of the game ball by a magnetic force such as a magnet to win a prize.

  Next, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a radio wave sensor error notification process (step B2005). In the radio wave sensor error notification process, an error is notified based on a command transmitted from the game control device 600 based on the abnormality detected by the radio wave sensor 24.

  Finally, the main control microcomputer 710 executes human sensor error notification processing (step B2005). In the human sensor error notification process, the effect control device 700 notifies an error independently based on the abnormality detected by the human sensor 590.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 111, the human sensor 590 is arranged to cover an area (human sensor detection range) 992 that cannot be covered by the magnetic sensor 23. Thus, by setting the region 992 that is not the detection range 991 of the magnetic sensor 23 as the detection range by the human sensor 590, the number of the magnetic sensors 23 can be reduced.

  The magnetic sensor 23 may be accommodated in the dummy accommodating portion 275. Thereby, the detection range of the magnetic sensor 23 can be expanded. Further, although the magnetic sensor 23 is provided on the decorative member behind the game board, it may be arranged on the front or back of the game board 32.

  In the present embodiment, the human sensor 590 is used for production when the right effect device 500 is movable. However, when the right effect device 500 is not movable, the human sensor 590 is caused to function as an abnormality detection sensor. As described above, control is performed so that an abnormality (error) is notified when the human sensor 590 is in a detection state for a predetermined time or longer. Details of the human sensor error notification process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As described above, the detection range by the human sensor 590 covers the upstream portion of the general winning opening 40 arranged at the lower right. In this way, by setting the detection range upstream of the winning opening, it is possible to effectively detect an abnormal action that may be fraudulent.

  Next, the details of the human sensor error process (step B2006) in the gaming machine error monitoring process described above will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart illustrating a human sensor error processing procedure according to the first embodiment of this invention. In the human sensor error process, while the performance using the human sensor 590 is not executed, the human sensor 590 reports an error when human detection is continued for a predetermined period.

  First, the main control microcomputer 710 checks whether or not a variable display game (effect operation variable display game) for performing a rendering operation by the right rendering device 500 is being executed (step B7601). Then, it is determined whether or not the effect movement variation display game is being executed (step B7602). If the effect movement variation display game is being executed (the result of step B7602 is “Y”), the processing after step B7609 is executed.

  When the effect operation variation display game is not being executed (the result of Step B7602 is “N”), the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the human motion detection state is set (Step B7603). If it is a human detection state (the result of step B7603 is “Y”), the error determination counter is updated by one (step B7604).

  The main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the value of the error determination counter has reached the error determination value (step B7605). When the value of the error determination counter reaches the error determination value (the result of step B7605 is “Y”), error notification is executed (step B7606). The error detection by the human sensor is due to the fact that a part of the player's body is located at a position unrelated to the game, so the error notification is performed for a short time (for example, about 1 to 2 seconds). ) Or may be canceled as soon as the non-human detection state is reached.

  On the other hand, if the main control microcomputer 710 is not in the human detection state (the result of step B7603 is “N”), the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the non-human detection state continues for a predetermined time (step B7607). . If the non-human detection state continues (the result of step B7607 is “Y”), the error determination counter is reset (step B7608).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is determined that an error has occurred when a human detection state is detected a predetermined number of times within a predetermined period, and a notification sound is output. That is, an abnormal situation (in other words, there is a possibility of fraud) that the human sensor 590 that is normally in the non-human detection state (non-detection state) is in the human detection state (detection state) for a predetermined period. Occurrence) can be determined.

  Next, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not an error is being notified (step B7609). If no error notification is being made (the result of step B7609 is “N”), the human sensor error process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the error is being notified (the result of step B7609 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether the error notification release condition is satisfied (step B7610). The condition for canceling the error notification is, for example, when there is a cancel input from an employee or a player of the game hall, and when the non-human detection state continues for a predetermined time. The release input may be provided with a dedicated switch or may be a special operation such as a long press of the effect button 17 (for example, 3 seconds).

  When the error notification cancellation condition is satisfied (the result of step B7610 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 cancels the error notification (step B7611). On the other hand, if the error notification release condition is not satisfied (the result of step B7610 is “N”), the error notification is continued, and then the human sensor error processing is terminated.

  According to the present embodiment, the detection by the human sensor (non-contact sensor, infrared sensor) 590 is used for performing a predetermined effect (right part effect) and also used for determining the occurrence of an abnormality. Accordingly, it is possible to effectively use the human sensor 590 at times other than when performing an effect.

  By the way, in a conventional gaming machine, a special game state is not started only when the variable display game has a special result, and a specific gate (lottery gate) provided in the game area after the variable display game has a special result. ) To execute a supplementary game in which the number of rounds is determined based on a random number extracted based on the passing of the game ball, and to start a special game state corresponding to the number of rounds determined in the supplementary game. A thing is proposed (for example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2008-132167). Also, a plurality of specific gates (lottery gates) are provided, and an auxiliary game is executed in which the type of special game state is determined according to the lottery form corresponding to the specific gate through which the game ball has passed after the variable display game has a special result. A gaming machine has also been proposed (for example, JP 2009-189504 A).

  However, in a gaming machine that executes an auxiliary game that determines the type of special game state (number of rounds, etc.) by passing through a specific gate as described in the above-mentioned patent document, the content of the auxiliary game is There was a problem that the player could not understand immediately. In addition, when a game ball passes through a specific gate for the first time after a special result, the type of special game state is determined, so that the game ball fired during the variable display game passes through the specific gate, and the player There was also a possibility that the type of special gaming state would be determined against the will of the player.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the present embodiment, while allowing the player to understand the contents of the auxiliary game for selecting the jackpot determination method, the number of jackpot rounds (in the special gaming state) against the player's intention. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the type is determined.

  Some conventional gaming machines include a non-contact sensor (such as an infrared sensor) that can detect that a part of the player's body (mainly a hand) has entered the detection range at a predetermined position on the game board. A sensor that provides a predetermined effect based on detecting a part (mainly a hand) of the player's body with a non-contact sensor during the effectable period has been proposed (for example, JP, 2010-124445, A).

  However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, the input from the non-contact sensor is effective only during the stage where the presentation can be performed, and the non-contact sensor cannot be effectively used.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the present embodiment, it is possible to effectively utilize a non-contact sensor capable of detecting a part of the player's body in addition to the production.

  In addition, some conventional gaming machines have a gaming board in which a gaming area in which gaming balls can flow down is formed on the front surface of a gaming board that is detachably stored in a frame, and the gaming board is made of a transparent resin. There has been proposed a gaming machine that aims to improve the decoration effect by disposing a decorative member at the rear and allowing the decorative member to be seen through a game board (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-99515).

  However, in the case of using a game board made of a transparent resin as in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, the static electricity is more easily charged than the wooden game board, and the gaming machine is caused by the charged static electricity. May malfunction. Therefore, it is conceivable that the static electricity charged on the game board escapes to the grounded frame body and is removed. However, if the game board is provided with a conductive member that can contact the frame, the operator may be injured by the conductive member when the game board is transported or attached.

  In contrast, according to the gaming machine described in the present embodiment, the static electricity charged on the transparent resin game board can be released to the frame body side and removed, and the conductive board can be used for transporting and removing the gaming board. It is also possible to prevent the worker from being injured.

  In addition, in some conventional gaming machines, the game board is made of a transparent resin, and a decorative member is disposed on the rear side so that the decorative member can be seen through the game board, thereby improving the decoration effect. A machine has been proposed (for example, JP 2010-99515 A).

  However, when a game board made of transparent resin is used as in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, a wiring process for routing the wiring of the electrical components arranged on the game board to the rear of the game board is performed. It has been broken. At this time, since the wiring of the electrical components routed behind the game board can be visually recognized through the game board of the transparent member, the beauty of the back of the game board is impaired, and the visibility of the decorative member is reduced. The problem of letting it happen.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the present embodiment, it is possible to efficiently perform the wiring process of the electrical component as compared with the case where the wiring of the electrical component is routed to the end of the decoration space through the front of the three-dimensional decoration member. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the beauty of the back (back side) of the game board and the visibility of the decorative member.

  In addition, in a conventional gaming machine, a movable effect device having a movable effect member capable of performing a predetermined effect operation in front of the display unit of the display device is provided, and can be moved according to the progress of the variable display game. There has also been proposed a gaming machine in which the rendering operation is made more complicated by driving the rendering member by a plurality of driving units (for example, JP 2011-125543 A).

  However, as in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, if a relatively large movable effect device is disposed around the display device, there is a space for arranging other movable effect devices, decoration members, and the like. There is a problem of narrowing. Therefore, if the movable effect member is downsized to secure space, or if the operation mode of the movable effect member is made monotonous, the effect of the effect is naturally reduced, which also causes a decrease in the interest of the game. End up.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the present embodiment, it is possible to effectively improve the effect of the movable effect device while efficiently using the limited space around the display device.

(Second Embodiment)
In the gaming machine of the second embodiment, whether or not a defective product or a connection failure has occurred by performing the confirmation lighting of the collective display device (special / general-purpose LED substrate, display substrate) 50. It is configured to be able to determine whether or not the power is turned on.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the second embodiment includes a second sub display device (second display device) disposed behind the game board. Further, a special effect can be executed periodically (for example, at a predetermined time) with a plurality of gaming machines.

  In the first embodiment, when the result of the variable display game is a specific big hit, the game ball is passed through the first passing gate part 34g or the second passing gate part 34h, so that the special gaming state It was configured to determine the lottery method for the number of rounds. In the second embodiment, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is further achieved by passing the game ball through the first pass gate part 34g or the second pass gate part 34h during the special game state and / or at the end. It is configured so that it can be determined.

  In the following, the features of the gaming machine in the second embodiment described above and the configuration different from the gaming machine in the first embodiment will be described. First, the configuration and control of the collective display device (special / general-purpose LED substrate) 50 will be described.

[Configuration of collective display device (special / general-purpose LED substrate)]
FIG. 113 is a diagram showing a collective display device (special / general-purpose LED substrate) 50 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 114 is a diagram illustrating an appearance of a game control device 600 that controls the collective display device 50 according to the second embodiment of this invention.

  As in the first embodiment, the collective display device 50 according to the second embodiment is a first special figure variation display unit for a variation display game configured by a 7-segment display (LED lamp) or the like. (Special Figure 1 Display) 51, Second Special Figure Fluctuation Display Unit (Special Figure 2 Display) 52, General Figure Display Unit (General Figure Display) 53 for the Normal Figure Change Display Game, and Each Fluctuation Display Game Storage display units (special figure 1 hold display part 54, special figure 2 hold display part 55, general figure hold display part 56). A display unit indicating the progress of the game other than the first special figure fluctuation display part 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display part 52 is referred to as a progress display part.

  In addition, the collective display device 50 has a high-probability display unit and a short-time state for notifying that the probability state of the big hit is a high probability state from the time when the gaming machine 1 is turned on until the first big hit occurrence. Then, a gaming state display unit 57 including a short-time state display unit that lights up and notifies the occurrence of a short-term state, and the number of rounds at the time of big hit (number of opening and closing rounds of the first special variable winning device 41 and the second special variable winning device 42) Is displayed.

  115 for the first special figure fluctuation display section (special figure 1 display) 51, FIG. 116 for the second special figure fluctuation display section (special figure 2 display) 52, and FIG. 117 for the other display sections. While explaining.

  The collective display device 50 includes a board-side connector 65 configured with 12 pins in one row, and is connected to the connection wiring 66 through a wiring-side connector (wiring end connector) 66a. The other end of the connection wiring 66 is connected to a collective display connector (display connector) 693 of the game control device 600.

  114 is configured as a board box that houses a game control board. The board box has a mounting base (first case member) attached to the gaming machine 1 and a lid member (second case) which is attached to the mounting base and defines a storage space for storing the game control board between the mounting base. Member). The board box is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the game control board housed inside can be seen through even when the lid member is attached to the mounting base.

  The mounting base (first case member) and the lid member (second case member) are sealed by a one-way screw (fixing tool) that can be turned only in the tightening direction. In order to take out the game control board, it is necessary to disconnect the one-way screw. Therefore, when the attachment between the mounting base and the lid member is released, the trace remains, and can be easily detected when an illegal act such as exchanging the game control board is performed.

  The game control device 600 is provided with a terminal for connecting to each component in the gaming machine or to an external device. Specifically, a first start port switch connector 691, a second start port switch connector 692, a collective display connector 693, an effect connector 694, and various switch connectors 695 are provided on the board box in order from the left. Further, a test terminal connector 696 is provided on the lower left side, and an information output connector 697 and a power connector 698 are provided on the lower right side.

  Explaining each terminal, the first start port switch connector 691 is connected to the first start port switch 601, the second start port switch connector 692 is connected to the second start port switch 602, and a game ball wins the start port. A signal is input.

  The collective display connector 693 is connected to the collective display device 50 as described above. The collective display connector 693 has two rows and 12 pins, and details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 118 and 119. Further, the collective display connector 693 is disposed between other connectors, that is, inside the other connectors. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of occurrence of damage / connection failure factors such as hitting a game ball at the time of installation on an island facility, etc., and various displays are not displayed on the collective display device 50 so that game progress can be grasped. Inconveniences that cannot be prevented can be prevented.

  The effect control device 700 is connected to the effect connector 694, and a command related to the game is transmitted. A count switch or the like is connected to the various switch connectors 695. The inspection terminal connector 696 is connected to the inspection device 670, and an inspection signal is output. The information output connector 697 outputs game data to an external device (not shown) such as an information collection device or a management device. The power supply connector 698 is connected to the power supply device 800 and the payout control device 640 to receive power supply, input a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal, and send and receive commands related to payout.

[Display mode of batch display device]
Next, the display of the special figure display (special figure 1 display 51, special figure 2 display 52) will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 and 116. FIG. FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining a display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 according to the second embodiment of this invention. FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining a display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 according to the second embodiment of this invention. (A) is a figure explaining the structure and variation mode of a special figure display, (B) is a figure which shows the list of the result display mode of a variation display game. Note that the difference between the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 and the display mode of the special figure 2 display 52 is only whether or not the dot (DP) is lit. Will be described.

  Referring to (A), the special figure display is a so-called 7-segment display (7-segment LED). The special figure indicator is composed of a rectangle with one horizontal segment (segments a, d) and two vertical segments (segments f, e, b, c), and the remaining one segment (segment g) crosses the middle of the rectangle. The figure is 8 in shape. At the lower right of segment c, a circular segment D.P. P is arranged.

  The special figure display in the present embodiment starts the variable display from the state where all the segments are turned off. At this time, similarly to whether the previous result display mode is a loss or a win, similarly, starting from the extinction and turning on and off repeatedly, the variable display is performed. Thereby, since the display mode of the special figure indicator changes immediately after the start of the change, it is possible to immediately grasp that the change is being displayed.

  (B) is a figure which shows the list of the result display mode of a variable display game. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, 18 types of result display modes are defined per lose and 1 to 9 and A to H. In the special figure 1 display 51, the D.D. P is turned on, and as shown in FIG. P is turned off.

  When the result display mode is lost, the segments g and D.D. P is turned on and all other segments are turned off. During the variable display, regardless of the result, the display of the loss and the full extinction are alternately displayed, but the variable display including the winning symbol may be performed. Further, the result display mode of the special figure display is determined corresponding to the result of the variable display game.

  In addition, the result display modes are not limited to the 18 types shown in FIGS. 115 and 116, and more types may be defined, or the numbers may be different between Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2. For example, you may determine according to the result and fluctuation pattern of a fluctuation display game. Further, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be reversed.

  FIG. 117 is a diagram illustrating an output mode other than the special-purpose display in the collective display device 50 according to the second embodiment of this invention.

  The special figure 1 hold display section 54 is composed of four LEDs, and displays the number of unprocessed times (starting memory number) of the first variable display game by the number of lit LEDs. Similarly, the special figure 2 hold display section 55 displays the number of unprocessed times (starting memory number) of the second variable display game.

  The gaming state display unit 57 includes two LEDs, a high probability notification LED and a time reduction notification LED. The high-probability notification LED is turned on in a high-probability state (probability change state) when power is turned on (specifically, when a power failure is restored), and is turned off when the first big hit occurs. In addition, the high-probability notification LED is controlled not to be lit even in a high-probability state at normal times. In addition, when it is not a high probability state, it is turned off. Further, the time-shortening notification LED is controlled so as to be lit in the time-short state regardless of whether it is a normal time or when the power is turned on.

  The general map hold display unit 56 is composed of two LEDs, a first general memory display and a second general memory display, and the first general memory display and the second general memory display are both turned off. If it is, it indicates that the number of unprocessed times (starting memory number) of the usual figure display game is “0”. In addition, when the first map memory display is turned on and the second map memory display is turned off, the number of unprocessed times of the map change display game is “1”, and the first map memory display and the second map map display When both of the common map storage indicators are lit, it indicates that the number of unprocessed times of the common map fluctuation display game is “2”. Further, when the first map memory indicator is blinking and the second map memory indicator is lit, the unprocessed number of times of the normal map variable display game is “3”, the first map memory indicator and When both of the two common map storage indicators are blinking, it indicates that the number of unprocessed times of the common map variable display game is “4”.

  When the game ball passes through the map start gate 36, the map display section (map display) 53 changes from a light-off state to a blinking state that alternately turns on and off, and the map-variable display game is running. It is LED which shows that it is. When the general map display section 53 is flashing, it indicates that the general map variable display game is being displayed in a variable display, and when the general map display section 53 is lit, the result of the general map display game is a hit. When the general map display section 53 is turned off, it indicates that the result of the general map display game is out of place. Note that the change start may be started not from turning off the light but from the display form opposite to the result display form in the previous usual map change display game.

  The round number display unit 59 includes three LEDs, a first round number display unit, a second round number display unit, and a third round number display unit. When the first round number display unit is lit and the second round number display unit and the third round number display unit are off, the game result of the first variation display game or the second variation display game is 5R big hit. Show. Similarly, when the first round number display unit and the third round number display unit are turned off and the second round number display unit is turned on, the first round number display unit and the second round number display unit are turned off for 10R big hit. When the third round number display portion is lit, it is 15R big hit, and when the first round number display portion, the second round number display portion and the third round number display portion are lit, it is 16R big hit. Show.

[Wiring of batch display device]
Next, the wiring between the collective display device 50 including the special figure display and the connector will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 118 is a diagram for explaining a 7-segment LED that constitutes the special-purpose display according to the second embodiment of the present invention. (A) shows each segment and terminal, and (B) shows a circuit diagram. The 7-segment LED shown in FIG. 118 corresponds to the special figure 1 display 51.

  As shown to (A), 7 segment LED which comprises the special figure indicator in this embodiment is segment a-segment g and D.D. It is composed of 8 P LEDs. The 7-segment LED is provided with 10 terminals 1 to 10.

  And, as shown in (B), terminal 1 is for segment a, terminal 10 is for segment b, terminal 8 is for segment c, terminal 5 is for segment d, terminal 4 is for segment e, and terminal is for segment f. 2, segment g has terminal 3, D. A terminal 6 is connected to P. Moreover, 7-segment LED of this embodiment is an anode common, and the terminal 9 and the terminal 7 are a common + pole.

  FIG. 119 is a diagram illustrating a collective display connector of the game control device 600 connected to the collective display device 50 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. (A) shows the pin arrangement of the connector, and (B) shows the correspondence between the pins and the output data.

  As shown in (A), the collective display connector has a structure of two rows and 12 pins. Also, as shown in (B), LED segment 0 to LED segment 7 that outputs a signal for lighting each LED are assigned to pins 1 to 8, and output destinations are assigned to pins 9 to 12 respectively. The designated LED digits 0 to 3 are assigned. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 120, the special figure 1 display 51 is designated when the LED digit 0 is on, and the special figure 2 display 52 is designated when the LED digit 1 is on. Details of LEDs other than 7-segment are shown in FIG.

  The 7-segment LED that constitutes the special figure indicator has 10 terminals, and pins 1 to 10 are connected to each terminal. As shown in FIGS. 118 and 119, the LED digit 0 is connected to a terminal 9 (common terminal) which is an anode common. Further, a pin (3) for outputting data signals of LED segment 2, LED segment 6, LED digit 0, and LED digit 1 for displaying a loss symbol or changing state in special figure 1 display 51 and special figure 2 display 52. Pins, 7 pins, 9 pins, and 10 pins) are not arranged at the endmost part of the connector, but are arranged closer to the middle than the endmost part.

  Basically, the pin at the end of the connector is subjected to the most load during connector connection or wiring processing, and therefore, it is easier to break or to be half-inserted than other pins. Therefore, by adopting the pin arrangement as described above, connection failure is unlikely to occur in the pin corresponding to a specific light emitting member when the board side connector and the wiring one end side connector are attached and detached.

  Therefore, it is possible to prevent a specific light emitting member from blinking, and to understand that a losing symbol that appears more frequently than the winning symbol is not displayed or that it is in a variable display (the progress of the variable display game). The inconvenience that it cannot be done is less likely to occur. In addition, it is possible to avoid as much as possible the inconvenience that the game state cannot be grasped from the state display unit.

  FIG. 120 is a diagram illustrating a connection between each pin of the collective display connector according to the second embodiment of the present invention and each terminal constituting the collective display device 50.

  As described above, the LED (“g” in the middle) for displaying the loss symbol in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 and the LED for displaying the change (“g” and “DP”). The pin arrangement corresponding to “)” is not arranged at the outermost end portion of the connector, but is arranged in the middle of the endmost portion. In other words, the changing LED and the display of the loss are performed by the segment LED whose pin arrangement is not at the extreme end. Further, the pin arrangement of the LED digits 0 and 1 related to the display of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is not the extreme end. It should be noted that the pin arrangement corresponding to the state display part important for identifying / obtaining the game state is not arranged at the endmost part of the connector, but is arranged in the middle of the end part.

  120, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are connected by a common data line, but each segment is connected to a different signal line. For example, in the special figure 1 display 51, 1 pin (LED segment 0) is connected to the segment (a), but in the special figure 2 display 52, 2 pins (LED segment 1) are connected to the segment (a). It is connected.

  On the other hand, different signal lines are connected so that the LED digit 0 is connected to the common terminal of the special figure 1 display 51 and the LED digit 1 is connected to the common terminal of the special figure 2 display 52.

  By configuring as described above, a segment indicating fluctuation or loss of the other display unit even if display on the segment (g) indicating change or loss of the display unit due to abnormality of the signal line or wiring is not possible. The display on (g) is enabled. As a matter of course, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be connected to the same signal line in each segment.

  Contrary to the present embodiment, if the pin arrangement corresponding to the segment LED with the highest lighting frequency is arranged at the end of the connector, there is an advantage that it is easy to find an abnormality in the signal line or an abnormality in the segment.

[Modification of the display mode of the batch display device]
Subsequently, a modified example of the output mode of the collective display device 50 will be described. FIG. 121 is a diagram illustrating a first modification of the display mode indicating that the 7-segment LED according to the second embodiment of the present invention is changing.

  In the first modification, the dot LED is first turned on from the previous display result, and thereafter, the loss LED and the dot LED are alternately turned on. Even in such a configuration, since the display mode changes from the previous display result at the start of the variable display, it is possible to immediately grasp that the variable display is being performed.

  FIG. 122 is a diagram illustrating a second modification of the display mode in which the 7-segment LED according to the second embodiment of the present invention is being changed.

  In the second modification, the LEDs (ce) are sequentially arranged with the pin arrangement of the connector not at the extreme end so as not to become a loss display mode or a hit display mode first after starting from the previous display result. Light up. Even in such a configuration, as in the first modification, the display mode changes from the previous display result at the start of the variable display, so that it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display is being performed.

  FIG. 123 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the display mode in which the 7-segment LED according to the second embodiment of the present invention is used to indicate a loss. In addition, (A)-(C) have shown the losing display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51. FIG.

  The loss display mode 1 in (A) is a display mode in which the segment (g) and the segment (DP) are turned on, as in the present embodiment. (B) Loss display mode 2 is a display mode in which segment (d) and segment (DP) are lit. (C) Loss display mode 3 is a display mode in which segment (d), segment (g), and segment (DP) are lit. In the case of the special figure 2 display 52, the segment (DP) may be prevented from being lit.

  One of these display modes may be a lost mode, or a plurality of modes may be combined. Further, in any of these modes, the pin arrangement of the collective display connector corresponding to each segment is not arranged at the extreme end.

  Further, when a plurality of losing modes are displayed in combination, an effect corresponding to the derived losing display mode may be performed. FIG. 124 is a diagram illustrating an example of switching the effect mode in accordance with the loss display mode according to the second embodiment of the present invention.

  In the example shown in FIG. 124, first, an effect by the effect stage A is executed. When the loss display mode 1 is derived as a result of the variable display game, the effect stage A is continued without changing the effect stage. If the stage is another stage, the stage may be changed to stage A.

  Further, when the loss display mode 2 is derived as a result of the variable display game, an image of the shutter is displayed on the variable display device 35, and the stage shifts to the effect stage B. Similarly, when the loss display mode 3 is derived, an image of the shutter is displayed on the fluctuation display device 35, and the process proceeds to the effect stage C.

  At this time, the stop display time after the variable display is ended differs depending on the type of the loss display mode, the loss display mode 1 without stage change as an effect is short, and the loss display mode 2 with stage change as an effect. And the loss display mode 3 is made longer.

  Next, a modification of the collective display device (special / general-purpose LED substrate) 50 will be described. In the collective display device 50 according to the present embodiment, the 7-segment LED and the 16 single LEDs are used. However, other configurations may be used. A modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126.

  FIG. 125 is a diagram illustrating a first modification of the collective display device 50 according to the second embodiment of this invention. All the collective display devices 50 of the first modification are configured by 7-segment LEDs. FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a second modification of the collective display device 50 according to the second embodiment of the invention. The collective display device 50 according to the second modification is entirely composed of a single LED.

  In any configuration, since the number of LEDs to be controlled is the same, it may be controlled similarly to the present embodiment. Further, the pin arrangement of the connector is the same, and an LED (middle “g”) for displaying a lost pattern in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 and an LED (“g ”And“ DP ”) are arranged so as not to be arranged at the end of the connector. Also, the pin arrangement corresponding to the game state display section 57 is not arranged at the end of the connector.

[Confirmation of lighting of batch display device]
Next, a procedure for confirming lighting of the collective display device 50 will be described. FIG. 127 is a flowchart of the latter half of the main process in the game control apparatus 600 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. The first half of the main process is the same as that in the first embodiment.

  In the second embodiment, a confirmation display for confirming whether the collective display device 50 is normally lit is possible. The confirmation display is performed when the power is turned on accompanied by the RAM clear. The confirmation display may be performed every time not only when the RAM is cleared but also when the power is turned on (including when the power is restored).

  The game control device 600 saves the execution flag in the lighting confirmation execution flag area after the process of step A1042 is completed (step A1050). When the execution flag is saved in the lighting confirmation execution flag area, the lighting confirmation is executed in the segment LED editing process (step A1111) of the timer interruption process. Details of the segment LED editing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 128 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of segment LED editing processing according to the second embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 600 performs a lighting confirmation process for the collective display device 50 (steps A4001 to A4008). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variable display game is being executed (step A4001). When the variable display game is being executed (the result of step A4001 is “Y”), the confirmation control timer and the lighting confirmation execution flag area are cleared without performing the lighting confirmation processing (step A4008), and the subsequent processing is performed. Run.

  On the other hand, when the variable display game is not being executed (the result of step A4001 is “N”), the game control device 600 checks the lighting confirmation execution flag area (step A4002), and whether or not the execution flag is set. Is determined (step A4003). If the execution flag is not set (the result of Step A4003 is “N”), the processing after Step A4009 is executed.

  When the execution confirmation flag for lighting confirmation is set (the result of Step A4003 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 600 updates the confirmation control timer by +1 (Step A4004). Then, confirmation display data corresponding to the value of the confirmation control timer is saved in the segment area (step A4005). Based on the confirmation display data saved in the segment area, the output mode of the batch display device 50 is updated in the process of step A1103 of the timer interrupt process. Details of the confirmation display will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the game control device 600 checks whether or not the confirmation control timer has reached the all confirmation process end value (step A4006), and determines whether or not the all confirmation process end value has been reached (step A4007). If all the confirmation process end values have been reached (the result of step A4007 is “Y”), the confirmation control timer and lighting confirmation execution flag area are cleared (step A4008), and the subsequent processing is executed. On the other hand, if the end value of all the confirmation steps has not been reached (the result of step A4007 is “N”), the subsequent processing is executed without clearing the confirmation control timer and the lighting confirmation execution flag area.

  When the lighting confirmation processing of the collective display device 50 is completed, the game control device 600 first sets the lighting pointer as the blinking control pointer (step A4009). Subsequently, the display control timer is updated by +1 (step A4010). Further, it is checked whether the display control timer is on timing (step A4011), and it is determined whether it is on timing (step A4012). If it is not the on-timing (the result of step A4012 is “N”), the extinction pointer is set as the blinking control pointer (step A4013).

  Next, the game control apparatus 600 sets a general figure reservation number table (step A4014). Subsequently, the display data corresponding to the number of reserved maps and the blinking control pointer is acquired and saved in the segment area (step A4015).

  Next, the game control apparatus 600 sets a special figure 1 hold number display table (step A4016). Subsequently, display data corresponding to the special figure 1 holding number is acquired and saved in the segment area (step A4017). Similarly, a special figure 2 hold number display table is set (step A4018), and then display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is acquired and saved in the segment area (step A4019).

  Next, the game control apparatus 600 sets a round display LED display table (step A4020). Subsequently, display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer is acquired and saved in the segment area (step A4021). Further, a game state display table is set (step A4022), display data corresponding to the game state display number is acquired, and saved in the segment area (step A4023).

  Finally, the game control device 600 determines whether or not the high probability notification flag is set to ON (step A4024). If the high probability notification flag is not set to ON (the result of step A4024 is “N”), the off-data of the high probability LED is saved in the segment area (step A4025).

  Next, the confirmation display of each LED of the collective display device 50 will be described. FIG. 129 is a diagram illustrating an example of a confirmation display of the collective display device 50 according to the second embodiment of this invention.

  In the confirmation display of the collective display device 50 in the present embodiment, each LED is turned on in the modes shown in (A) to (F). More specifically, after the RAM is cleared, as shown in (A), all the LEDs are turned on to confirm the abnormality of the collective display device 50.

  Thereafter, the LED corresponding to each LED digit is turned on for checking the abnormal location. Specifically, an LED corresponding to LED digit 0 shown in (B), an LED corresponding to LED digit 1 shown in (C), an LED corresponding to LED digit 2 shown in (D), and an LED shown in (E) The LEDs corresponding to the digit 3 are lit in the order. And finally, as shown in (F), a confirmation display is complete | finished as the state which displayed the loss symbol on the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52. FIG.

  In this embodiment, lighting corresponding to each LED digit is switched at intervals of 3 seconds. At this time, the blinking display may be performed for 3 seconds in which each LED digit is lit.

  By configuring as described above, it is possible to efficiently check whether or not a defect related to the plurality of light emitting members (LEDs) constituting the collective display device 50 has occurred. In addition, when the variable display game is being executed, the confirmation lighting control is not executed (the confirmation lighting control is stopped), so that the execution of the variable display game is not hindered by the confirmation lighting control.

  Also, simultaneous lighting control (either dynamic lighting or static lighting) makes it possible to instantaneously determine a wiring connection failure or a light emitting member failure. Furthermore, it is possible to determine the erroneous connection of the wiring at the end connector by the sequential lighting control in units of LED digits (display blocks). Moreover, it is possible to efficiently check for defects by giving priority to checking whether or not the light emitting member is lit rather than checking for incorrect wiring connections. Furthermore, by sequentially lighting the display units corresponding to the LED digits by the sequential lighting control, it becomes possible to efficiently check the lighting of the plurality of display units.

  Subsequently, a modified example of the confirmation display of the collective display device 50 will be described. FIG. 130 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the confirmation display of the 7-segment LED included in the collective display device 50 according to the second embodiment of this invention.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 130, for the 7-segment LED, after all the segments are turned on, the segments for confirmation display are blinked and the segments to be confirmed are sequentially moved. The confirmation display is performed for the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 in a common procedure. The lighting of each segment is switched at intervals of 3 seconds. After all the confirmation patterns are completed, the confirmation process may be repeated a plurality of times so that confirmation display is performed again, or only once.

  The lighting order of each segment may be the order of segments (a) to (g) and dots after all lighting. However, the order is not limited to this. Good.

  FIG. 131 is a diagram for explaining a modification example of the confirmation display of a single LED included in the collective display device 50 according to the second embodiment of the present invention.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 131, for each single LED, first, after all the LEDs are turned on, the LEDs for confirmation display are blinked, and the confirmation target LEDs are sequentially moved. The confirmation display is performed by a common procedure for the single LED corresponding to the LED digit 2 and the single LED corresponding to the LED digit 3.

  Further, the lighting of each LED is switched at intervals of 3 seconds as in the case of the 7-segment LED. After all the confirmation patterns are completed, the confirmation process may be repeated a plurality of times so that confirmation display is performed again, or only once.

  As shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, by performing confirmation display of each segment and LED included in the collective display device 50, not only whether each segment and LED is turned on, but also an error in the wiring connection order to the collective display connector. It becomes possible to discover.

[Selecting the production mode by passing through the gate]
Subsequently, in the first embodiment, a specific big hit (second special result) occurs, and before the transition to the special gaming state, a game ball is placed on the first passing gate part 34g or the second passing gate part 34h. By passing through, the number of big hit rounds was drawn. In the second embodiment, the effect mode after completion of the special game state can be selected by passing the game ball through the first passage gate portion 34g or the second passage gate portion 34h.

  FIG. 132 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the passing gate switch monitoring process according to the second embodiment of this invention. The difference from the passing gate switch monitoring process of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 50 is that when the game ball passes through the passing gate during the big hit (special gaming state) and the effect mode is selected. The process ends without clearing the passage flag storage area and the round random number storage area.

  Specifically, the game control device 600, when the game ball passes through the passing gate and the big hit round is not being decided and the big hit is being made (the result of step A7107 is “Y”), the production ( It is determined whether or not the (variation) mode is being determined (step A7111). If the production (variation) mode is being determined (the result of step A7111 is “Y”), the process ends. On the other hand, if the mode is not being determined (the result of step A7111 is “N”), the pass flag storage area and the round random number storage area are cleared (step A7110), as in the first embodiment.

  In this embodiment, since the effect mode is selected when the big hit state ends, the effect mode is set in the big hit end process executed after the game ball has passed through the passing gate, that is, after the selection of the effect mode. The Details of the effect mode will be described later with reference to FIG. 134A.

  FIG. 133 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of jackpot end processing according to the second embodiment of this invention. Note that description of processing that is common to the first embodiment is omitted.

  First, the game control device 600 sets an effect mode determining flag indicating that the effect mode is being determined (step A3250), and the gate that passed first from the start of the big hit ending (the first passing gate unit 34g or A passage flag indicating the second passage gate portion 34h) is loaded from the passage flag region (step A3251).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the passage flag has been saved in the passage flag area (step A3252). If the passage flag is not saved in the passage flag area (the result of step A3252 is “N”), the effect mode has not been determined, and the big hit ending process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the passage flag is saved in the passage flag area (the result of step A3252 is “Y”), the processing from step A3201 to A3205 is executed as in the first embodiment. Then, an effect mode number selection table corresponding to the special figure game mode flag is acquired (step A3253). Details of the effect mode number selection table will be described later with reference to FIG. 134B.

  Furthermore, the game control apparatus 600 acquires the effect mode number corresponding to the passage flag loaded in step A3251 from the effect mode number selection table (step A3254). Then, the acquired effect mode number is saved in the effect mode number area (step A3255).

  Thereafter, the game control device 600 sets an effect command corresponding to the set effect mode number (steps A3210 to A3212). Finally, the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 is executed (step A3213), and the jackpot end process ends. At this time, the passage flag may be cleared.

  The effect mode is determined by passing the game ball through the passing gate during the big hit ending period. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the passing gate during the ending period, the big hit (special game state) does not end and the ending state remains maintained. Therefore, the special gaming state does not end unless the production mode is determined or set, so that the player can take a break.

  If the time limit is set during the ending period and the time is up, an effect mode corresponding to the special figure game mode flag may be selected. The production mode may be selected according to the situation.

  In addition, it is possible to select the production mode only in the case of a specific big hit (short time or certain change), or direct during the interval (predetermined number of times) instead of selecting the production mode during the big hit end process (ending). A mode may be selected.

  As described above, the effect mode is switched as soon as the game ball is passed through the passing gate, so there is no delay between the determination of the effect mode and the transition to the actually determined effect mode. It can suppress that interest falls. Further, since the gaming state is switched after the big hit ending process is finished, the effect mode is also switched when the game state is switched, and the player does not feel uncomfortable with the switching of the effect mode.

[Direction mode]
FIG. 134A is a diagram illustrating the effect mode according to the second embodiment of this invention. In the present embodiment, three types of effect modes are defined: a normal effect mode, a time reduction effect mode, and a probability change effect mode.

  The normal effect mode can be executed in a normal state (normal effect mode 1) or in a short time state (normal effect mode 2). In the normal performance mode 2, the actual gaming state is a short-time state, but a variation pattern corresponding to the normal state and various effects (pre-reading notice, normal notice, etc.) are performed. It should be noted that there is no difference in the production contents between the normal production mode 1 and the normal production mode 2.

  Similarly, the short-time effect mode can be executed in a short-time state (short-time effect mode 1) or a certain change state (short-time effect mode 2). In the short-time effect mode 2, the actual gaming state is a probable change state, but the variation pattern corresponding to the short-time state and various effects (pre-reading notice, normal notice, etc.) are performed. In addition, there is no difference in effect content between the time-saving effect mode 1 and the time-saving effect mode 2.

  In addition, the probability variation effect mode can be executed only in the probability variation state, as in the first embodiment. In other words, in the present embodiment, an effect mode in a gaming state that is more advantageous than the actual gaming state cannot be selected. As described above, the effect mode is determined for each game state after the end of the special game state, so that variations can be increased when determining the effect mode.

  Note that the normal performance mode may be selectable in the probability variation state. There are two types of pass gates in the present embodiment. For example, when a game ball passes through the first pass gate portion 34g, the normal effect mode is set. When a game ball passes through the second pass gate portion 34h, the time is shortened. In the effect mode, the probability variation mode may be selected when a predetermined time has passed without passing any gate or when the effect button 17 is operated. Further, passage gates corresponding to the number of selectable presentation modes may be provided.

  Further, as described above, the effect mode is selected during the ending at the end of the big hit (special game state). In the present embodiment, since the transition to either the time-saving state or the probability variation state is made after the big hit ends, the production mode cannot be selected in the normal state.

  FIG. 134B is a diagram illustrating an effect mode number selection table according to the second embodiment of this invention. (A) is a time reduction effect mode number selection table, and (B) is a probability change effect mode number selection table.

  As shown in FIG. 134B, the effect mode number is set according to the passage flag. The first passage flag is set when a game ball passes through the first passage gate portion 34g, and the second passage flag is set when a game ball passes through the second passage gate portion 34h.

  Therefore, as shown in (A), when shifting to the time-saving state, when the game ball is passed through the first passing gate part 34g, the normal effect mode is achieved. Is selected. Similarly, as shown in (B), when shifting to the probability changing state, if the game ball is passed through the first passing gate part 34g, the time-shortening effect mode is obtained, and if the game ball is passed through the second passing gate part 34h, the probability changing effect is provided. A mode is selected.

  In the present embodiment, since the production mode is set due to the player's launch operation, the production mode can be determined at the timing of his own pleasure with the pleasure of launching the game ball aiming at the specific area (pass gate). Fun can be granted. Thus, since it becomes possible to give the player the right to determine the effect mode, it is possible to improve the interest in determining the effect mode.

  Next, details of each effect mode will be described. FIG. 135A is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern selection table according to the game state and the number of holds in the game control device 600 according to the second embodiment of this invention. (A) shows the off time, and (B) shows the big hit time.

  As shown in (A), when the result of the variable display game is out of place, the selection table selected according to the number of holds is set to be different. Basically, a selection table in which a long fluctuation with a long fluctuation time is easily selected as the number of holdings is small is selected, and a selection table in which a short fluctuation with a short fluctuation time is easily selected as the number of holdings is large is selected. The reach occurrence probability is set to be different depending on the game state (effect mode).

  On the other hand, as shown in (B), in the case of a big hit, the reach is always generated regardless of the number of holdings, and the variation time is set to be relatively long. In addition, a common selection table is selected between the time-short state and the probability variation state.

  The effect control device 700 receives a command corresponding to the effect mode selected by the game control device 600 and executes the corresponding effect. FIG. 135B is a diagram illustrating an effect according to the effect mode in the effect control device 700 according to the second embodiment of this invention.

  The effect control device 700 selects an effect stage corresponding to the effect mode corresponding to the command received from the game control device 600. In the present embodiment, since the actual gaming state may differ from the gaming state in the production, the state notification is made on the display device (main display device or sub display device) so that the player can grasp the actual gaming state. Is made.

  When the normal effect mode is selected, an effect with a low degree of expectation is easily executed, so that the pre-reading notice effect and the normal notice effect are set to be easily executed. On the other hand, in the short-time effect mode and the probability variation effect mode, since the highly anticipated effect is originally executed, the execution frequency of the pre-reading notice effect and the normal notice effect is set to be less likely to be executed than in the normal effect mode. Yes.

[Specific example of selecting the production mode]
Next, the procedure for selecting the effect mode at the end of the big hit will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 136A to 139B. FIG. 136A is a diagram showing a message for selecting an effect mode displayed during the final round according to the second embodiment of this invention.

  As shown in FIG. 136A, when the final round (15 rounds) is started in the big hit, it is notified that the presentation mode after the big hit ends is selected during ending (selection indication notification (production mode selection explanation notification)). . Note that the selection suggestion notification may not be performed during the round, and may be performed, for example, during an interval (a preset number of intervals or every interval).

  FIG. 136B is a diagram illustrating a state at the end of the final round according to the second embodiment of this invention. When the final round is over, an ending is executed, and the gaming state ("probability change state" or "time-short state") after the jackpot is notified. Then, the top effect device 400 slides and descends, and the sub display device 480 is notified that the game ball is temporarily stopped from being emitted.

  Thereafter, as shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 137, an explanation for selecting the effect mode is displayed on the main display device 35. At this time, since the effect mode is selected by allowing the game ball to pass through the first pass gate part 34g or the second pass gate part 34h, the pass gate becomes valid (passage of the game ball can be detected). You may make it display time. In addition, the time until the pass gate becomes valid may not be displayed by setting the pass gate to be valid when the ending starts.

  When the passing gate is activated, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 137 and FIG. 138A, a notification indicating the open gate is given to the sub display device 480. The player can select a desired effect mode by firing a game ball in accordance with the suggestion displayed on the sub display device 480. At this time, the lens member indicating the passable gate is controlled to be lit. Thus, it is possible to determine an arbitrary effect mode by a simple operation of firing a game ball toward the sorting device 90 (sorting space 34f) according to the suggestion of the launch timing during the effective state.

  In addition, although the upper stage production device 400 including the sub display device 480 is in a state of sliding downward, notification may be performed after sliding upward and returning to the normal position.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 138B, when a game ball is fired and passed through one of the passing gates, a passing sound is output at the time of passing, and an effect mode is selected. As shown in FIG. 138B, since the game ball has passed through the first passing gate portion 34g on the left side, as shown in FIG. 139A, the time reduction effect mode is selected.

  When the ending is completed, the selected effect is executed as shown in FIG. 139B. At this time, since the gaming state is actually a probabilistic state and is different from the effect mode, the actual game state and the effect mode being executed are displayed on the main display device 35 and / or the sub display device 480. Like that.

  In FIG. 136A to FIG. 139B, the presentation mode after the big hit is determined during the ending, but the presentation mode after the big hit is determined at the interval between rounds, and the details (stage) of the presentation mode are further displayed during the ending. A modification that can be determined will be described. Hereinafter, a modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 140A to 144B.

  FIG. 140A is a diagram illustrating a message for selecting an effect mode displayed during the interval according to the second embodiment of this invention. Here, the total number of rounds is 15 rounds. In the present modification, a presentation mode selection suggestion notification (production mode selection explanation notification) is performed at an interval between the 12th and 13th rounds.

  FIG. 140B is a diagram showing a state when the effect mode is selected in the interval according to the second embodiment of the present invention. When transitioning to the selection mode of the effect mode, the gaming state (short time state) after the big hit is notified. Then, the top effect device 400 slides and descends, and the sub display device 480 is notified that the game ball is temporarily stopped from being emitted.

  Thereafter, as shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 141, a description for selecting the effect mode is displayed on the main display device 35. At this time, the time until the passing gate becomes valid (detection of passing of a game ball) is displayed.

  When the pass gate is activated, as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 141, the sub display device 480 is notified of the open gate, and a desired effect mode can be selected by firing a game ball. it can. Then, when a game ball is launched and passed through one of the passing gates, a passing sound is output at the time of passing, and an effect mode is selected. In this case, since the game ball has passed through the first passage gate 34g on the left side, the normal performance mode is selected as shown in the upper diagram of FIG.

  Thereafter, as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 142, when the final round (15 rounds) is reached, it is notified that the effect mode is selected again during the ending. Then, as shown in Fig. 143A, the game state after the big hit ("short time state") and the selected effect mode ("normal effect mode") are displayed, and the upper effect device 400 slides at this time. The sub-display device 480 is informed that the game ball is temporarily stopped from firing.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 143B, an explanation for selecting the effect mode is displayed on the main display device 35, and a time until the passing gate becomes valid (detection of passing of the game ball) is further displayed. The effect mode selected at this time is a detailed stage of the selected effect mode. Thus, in this modification, the player can specify more detailed production contents.

  When the passing gate is activated, as shown in FIG. 144A, the player can select a desired effect mode (stage) by firing a game ball according to the suggestion displayed on the sub display device 480. it can. In FIG. 144A, the “first effect stage” in the “normal effect mode” is selected.

  Thereafter, when the ending ends, as shown in FIG. 144B, the effect after the end of the big hit is executed based on the selected effect mode. At this time, since the gaming state is actually the short-time state and is different from the effect mode, the actual game state and the effect mode being executed are displayed on the main display device 35 and / or the sub display device 480. Like that. In this modified example, the selected stage is also displayed.

  The number of passing gates corresponding to the effect mode may be provided, and the effect mode determination period may be generated at an arbitrary timing until the big hit ends, and the effect mode in which the game ball passes during that time may be set. . Further, the effect mode may be determined without notifying the game state after the big hit, and the player may be able to guess the game state based on the effect mode generated after the big hit.

  As described above, according to the present modification, the effect mode is determined in a plurality of stages, so that opportunities for enjoying the determination of the effect mode can be increased. Also, it is possible to increase the types of effect modes by determining the effect modes in a plurality of stages.

[Right part production device (second sub display device)]
In the first embodiment, in addition to the main display device 35, the upper effect device 400 includes the sub display device 480. However, in the second embodiment, the right effect device 500 further includes the second sub device 480. A display device (second display device) 595 is provided. Hereinafter, the sub display device 480 is referred to as the first sub display device 480 so that it can be easily distinguished from the second sub display device 595.

  FIG. 145 is a front view of the game board 30 according to the second embodiment of this invention. About the structure which is common in the game board 30 of 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is assigned and description is abbreviate | omitted. The differences from the game board 30 of the first embodiment are the configuration and arrangement of the right stage production device 500, the point that a second normal start gate is provided, and the like. FIG. 146 is a diagram illustrating a right effect device 500 according to the second embodiment of this invention.

  The right portion production apparatus 500 according to the first embodiment is configured to be slidable in the left-right direction in front of the game board and is provided so as to be rotatable with respect to the decoration member 570, and a lower portion of the decoration member 570 And a pair of infrared sensors (human sensors) 590 attached to the camera.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 146, the right effect device 500 according to the second embodiment is configured to be slidable in the left-right direction behind the game board (second sub-display device 595). Is provided. In addition, a pair of infrared sensors (human sensors) 590 are arranged on the upper part of the right part rendering device 500, as in the first embodiment.

  Since the right portion production device 500 is disposed in the back side space of the game board 30 and the game board 32 is a transparent member, even if it is accommodated on the back side of the game board 30, the second sub The player can visually recognize the display content of the display device 595.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 145, the right stage production device 500 is arranged in the space on the back side of the game board 30, so that the right side of the center case 34, below the distribution device 90, from the first embodiment. A wider right game area 31b is formed. In contrast, the game area on the left side of the center case 34 is referred to as a left game area 31a, and the game area below the center case 34 is referred to as a lower game area 31c.

  In addition, a second general-purpose start gate 39 is disposed in the game area below the right game area 31b. As shown in FIG. 146, the second universal diagram start gate 39 is located at a position that does not overlap the right effect device 500 when viewed from the front when the right effect device 500 is accommodated on the back side of the game board 32. Be placed. Further, in the right game area 31b, the second sub display device 595 can be visually recognized without placing an opaque member other than the game nails. Therefore, it is possible to perform efficient display considering the visibility of the second sub display device 595.

  Between the center case 34 and the right game area 31b, an entry restriction wall 45 is provided in the center case 34 to prevent entry of game balls. The entry restriction wall 45 is made of a transparent member and does not hinder the visual recognition of the second sub display device 595.

  As described above, the right effect device 500 is configured to be slidable in the left-right direction. As shown in FIG. 146, all can be accommodated on the back side of the game board 30, and when moving to the leftmost side, the game board 30 overlaps the front of the main display device 35. When the second sub display device 595 moves, the appearance of the display unit is changed, and the effect of the display effect by the second sub display device 595 can be enhanced.

  In addition, since the second sub display device 595 is disposed on the front side of the main display device 35, it is possible to emphasize the sense of depth with these display devices. Further, the second sub display device 595 that needs to be seen through the game board 30 is arranged on the front side of the main display device 35, so that it is possible to reduce the difficulty in viewing the second sub display device 595. If the front and rear positions of the first sub display device 480 and the second sub display device 595 are made different, for example, the second sub display device 595 is arranged in front of the first sub display device 480, the depth sensation is further increased. Can be emphasized.

  Moreover, the right part production | presentation apparatus 500 is comprised so that operation | movement is also possible to an up-down direction and the front-back direction. Note that it is configured to operate in the up-down direction or the front-rear direction only when it does not move in the left-right direction. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the burden on the driving mechanism (moving mechanism) and prevent the occurrence of a failure. Note that the right effect device 500 may operate so as to rotate (swing) about an axis.

  Next, control of effects by the right part effect device 500 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 147 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the right effect operation control process according to the second embodiment of this invention.

  First, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not it is set to execute the right effect operation in the accessory effect operation setting process (step B1505) (step B7051). If it is not set to execute the right effect operation (the result of step B7051 is “N”), the right effect operation control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the main control microcomputer 710 is set to execute the right effect operation (the result of Step B7051 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the gas effect is set (Step S7051). B7052). The gaze effect is to execute the effect by the right effect device 500 (the initial effect in which the second sub display device 595 is expected to move in the left-right direction) even though the result of the variable display game is not satisfied. It is.

  When the gaze effect is set (the result of step B7052 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether it is the start timing of the gaze effect (step B7080). In the case of the production start timing of the gaze effect (the result of step B7080 is “Y”), the up and down movement and the operation time for the gaze effect of the movable decoration unit 550 are set (step 7081).

  Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the gas effect (step B7082). In the case of the end timing of the gas effect (the result of step B7082 is “Y”), an effect image for the gas effect is displayed (step 7083). Thereafter, the right effect operation control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the gaze effect is not set (the result of step B7052 is “N”), the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether it is the start timing of the initial effect (step B7053). If it is the start timing of the initial effect (the result of step B7053 is “Y”), the vertical operation and the operation time for the main effect of the movable decoration unit 550 are set (step 7054).

  Furthermore, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether it is the start timing of the main effect (step B7055). If it is the start timing of the main effect (the result of step B7055 is “Y”), the vertical operation and the operation time for the main effect of the movable decoration unit 550 are set (step 7056). Further, since the fourth symbol displayed on the main display device 35 becomes invisible due to the movement of the right part effect device 500, the fourth symbol is displayed on the second sub display device 595 (step B7057). At this time, the display of the 4th symbol may be continued on the main display device 35 or may not be displayed on the main display device 35 while the 4th symbol is displayed on the second sub display device 595. Good.

  Next, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the main effect to be executed is a hand-held notice effect (step B7058). When the hand-holding notice effect is executed (the result of Step B7058 is “Y”), the hand-holding notice image is displayed on the second sub display device 595 (Step B7059). Further, the maximum level of the level meter used for hand-holding notice effect is set according to the reliability that is a big hit (step B7060).

  If the main control microcomputer 710 does not execute the hand-holding notice effect (the result of step B7058 is “N”), the main control microcomputer 710 determines the type of the display notice effect according to the reliability that is a big hit (step B7061). Further, the display of the determined display notice effect is started on the second sub display device 595 (step B7062).

  Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not a hand-holding notice effect is being executed (step B7063). When the hand-holding announcement effect is being performed (the result of step B7063 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not a human detection period by the infrared sensor 590 is in progress (step B7064).

  When it is during the human detection period (the result of step B7064 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 updates the hand holding effect image (step B7065). Then, it is determined whether or not a hand hold by the player is detected by the infrared sensor 590 (step B7066). If the level meter does not reach the maximum level, the level gauge is updated by +1 (step B7067).

  On the other hand, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the display notice effect is being executed (step B7068) when the hand holding notice effect is not being performed (the result of step B7063 is “N”). If the display announcement effect is not being executed (the result of step B7068 is “N”), the right effect operation control process is terminated.

  When the display notice effect is being executed (the result of Step B7068 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 updates the display notice effect image displayed on the second sub display device 595 (Step B7069). Further, it is determined whether or not it is time to move the movable decoration unit 550 (second sub display device 595) up and down (step B7070).

  When it is time for the movable decoration unit 550 to move up and down (the result of step B7070 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 sets the vertical movement and operation time for the main effect of the movable decoration unit 550 ( Step 7071). On the other hand, if it is not time for the movable decoration unit 550 to perform the up-and-down motion (the result of Step B7070 is “N”), the right portion effect motion control process is terminated.

  Finally, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether it is the production end timing of the main effect (step B7072). If it is not the end timing of this effect (the result of step B7072 is “N”), the right effect operation control process is ended.

  On the other hand, the main control microcomputer 710 sets the return operation of the movable decorative unit 550 (step B7073) in the case of the end timing of the effect (the result of step B7072 is “Y”). Further, the fourth symbol displayed on the second sub display device 595 is displayed on the main display device 35 (step B7074), and the effect result image is displayed (step B7075).

  Subsequently, an effect produced by the right effect producing device 500 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 148, 149A, and 149B. FIG. 148 is a diagram illustrating an effect produced by the right effect device 500 according to the second embodiment of this invention.

  As described above, when the variable display game is started, the right effect operation control process is executed by the main control microcomputer 710 of the effect control device 700, and the effect by the right effect device 500 is executed, (A ), The movable decorative unit 550 (second sub-display device 595) of the right effect device 500 starts up and down movement. At this time, the fourth symbol 1481a for the special figure 1 variable display game and the fourth symbol 1481b for the special figure 2 variable display game are variably displayed in the lower right part of the main display device 35.

  In addition, the up-and-down movement of the movable decoration unit 550 shown in FIG. At this time, the display content of the second sub display device 595 has an ambiguous display mode in which it is not possible to determine which effect.

  When the effect to be executed is the main effect, as shown in (B), the movable decoration unit 550 slides to the main display device 35 side, and the variable display game is displayed on the second sub display device 595 as a special result (big hit). A display (“chance”) indicating that the degree of expectation is high is made. At this time, the 4th symbol 1481a for the special figure 1 variable display game and the 4th symbol 1481b for the special figure 2 variable display game cannot be visually recognized by the movement of the movable decoration unit 550. A fourth symbol 1482a for the one-variable display game and a fourth symbol 1482b for the special-figure two-variable display game are displayed. Thereafter, a hand-holding notice effect or a notice effect is executed. Details of the hand-holding notice effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 149A, and details of the notice effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 149B.

  On the other hand, when the effect to be executed is the gas effect, as shown in (C), the vertical movement of the movable decoration unit 550 is stopped and the second sub display device 595 has a low expectation (the gas effect). Display) is made.

  FIG. 149A is a diagram illustrating a hand-holding notice effect according to the second embodiment of this invention. When the hand-holding notice effect is started, as shown in (A), a level meter in which the maximum level is set according to the expected level of the running variable display game is displayed on the main display device 35. Then, a display indicating that the degree of expectation is high is made at the position where the right portion rendering apparatus 500 was accommodated. This display may be arranged in advance so as to be visible through the transparent game board 32 by the movement of the movable decoration unit 550, or by a display device arranged so as to overlap the right effect device 500. It may be a thing.

  When the movable decoration unit 550 moves to the front side of the main display device 35, the second sub display device 595 displays a message (“touch screen”) that prompts the player to hold the hand. And as shown to (B), when a player holds a hand ahead of the right part production | presentation apparatus 500, the infrared sensor 590 will detect and the gauge of a level meter will increase according to a detection time or the detection frequency. Note that the second sub display device 595 is instructed to touch with the hand, but in actuality, it is determined only whether or not human detection has been performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in (C), when a predetermined time elapses or the gauge is updated to the maximum level, a notice is displayed on the second sub display device 595. And when the right part production | presentation apparatus 500 moves to the right direction and returns to an initial position, the notice effect image or auxiliary | assistant effect image according to progress, an expectation degree, etc. of a variable display game are displayed.

  Next, a description will be given of the notice effect in which the movable decoration unit 550 moves and the notice image is displayed on the second sub display device 595, although the hand holding notice effect by the infrared sensor 590 is not performed. FIG. 149B is a diagram illustrating a notice effect by the second sub display device 595 according to the second embodiment of this invention.

  As shown in (A), when the movable decorative unit 550 moves in front of the main display device 35, the first preview image is displayed on the second sub display device 595. And the display which suggests paying attention to the 2nd sub display apparatus 595 is made on the main display apparatus 35, and as shown to (B), the movable decoration unit 550 starts an up-down operation | movement. At this time, a second preview image is displayed on the second sub display device 595.

  Thereafter, as shown in (C), the vertical movement of the movable decorative unit 550 is stopped, and the result suggesting image is displayed. Then, the movable decoration unit 550 returns to the initial position, but the result suggestion image is continuously displayed until the variable display game ends. Since the game board 32 is transparent, the player can visually recognize the result suggestion image even after returning to the initial position.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, even if the main display device 35 and the second sub display device 595 are provided, the layout of the game board layout is restricted by arranging the main display device 35 and the second sub display device 595 in the space on the back side of the game board 30. It is possible to ease the game and improve the interest of the game.

  Further, the width of the second sub display device 595 may be increased, and the opening (display window portion) 34a and the game board 32 may be disposed across the initial position. FIG. 150 is a diagram illustrating a modification in which the second sub display device 595 according to the second embodiment of the present invention is disposed across the opening (display window) 34a and the game board 32 at the initial position. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 150, in this modification, the horizontal width is wider than that of the second sub display device 595 of the second embodiment, and the entrance restriction wall 45 is displayed at the boundary at the initial position (normal position). The screen is configured to be divided. Therefore, the opening part 34a of this modification is extended outside the distribution apparatus 90 below the opening part 34a of 2nd Embodiment.

  In the present modification, when the right effect device 500 is arranged at the normal position, one side (non-perspective display area) and the other side (perspective display area) of the entrance restriction wall with the entry restriction wall 45 as a boundary. Different effect images are displayed. For example, in the non-perspective display area that can be seen without the game board 32 being interposed, the reserved memory number of the fourth symbol and the variable display game is displayed together with the auxiliary / preliminary image, and the see-through seeing through the game board 32 is visible. In the display area, model information and the like may be displayed together with the auxiliary / notice image. The effect image displayed in the non-perspective display area and the effect image displayed in the fluoroscopic display area may be the same or different. Further, the effect image may be displayed across the non-perspective display area and the fluoroscopic display area.

  The same effect image may be displayed in the non-perspective display area and the perspective display area. Further, the region located outside the entry restriction wall 45 may be shielded by a shielding member such as a decorative member so that only a part (inside the entry restriction wall) can be visually recognized in a normal state. Further, since the game board 32 and the entry restriction wall 45 are made of a transparent member, one effect image may be displayed regardless of the boundary.

  As described above, according to the present modification, since the edge of the opening window is used as a display boundary, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity from occurring even when different display is performed in the fluoroscopic display area and the non-fluoroscopic display area. In addition, the display area can be effectively used by displaying model information that is not frequently viewed in the fluoroscopic display area that is less visible than the non-transparent display area.

[Regular production]
In the gaming machine of the second embodiment, a regular effect (specific effect) in which a plurality of game machines installed in the game hall regularly perform the same effect is executed. The timing for executing the regular effects is set based on the time when the power is turned on. The power-on of the gaming machines is performed simultaneously in the same power supply area in a gaming store such as a gaming island, thereby making it possible to simultaneously execute regular effects on each gaming machine.

  FIG. 151 is a block configuration diagram showing a control system centering on the effect control device 700 of the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. The difference from the production control device 700 of the first embodiment is that an RTC (real time clock) 715 for measuring time is provided, and that power is supplied from the backup power supply unit 820 at the time of a power failure.

  The RTC 715 is a time measuring unit capable of measuring time information (date information, time information), and provides a time value in response to a request from the main control microcomputer 710. Further, the RTC 715 is supplied with power from a battery 716 which is a power source independent of the power supply device 800 and can continue to operate even when the gaming machine 1 is powered off.

  In addition, since power is supplied from the backup power supply unit 820, it is possible to maintain the reference time of the regular production even during a power failure, so that the regular production can be continuously executed even after a power failure occurs. It has become.

  Next, the 1st main process by the effect control device 700 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 152 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of 1st main processing that is executed by the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 710 of the presentation control device 700 according to the second embodiment of this invention. The difference from the first embodiment is that time information and the like are set in order to execute a regular effect, and the other processes are the same as those of the first embodiment.

  Specifically, the main control microcomputer 710 starts the 1st main process, prohibits interruption (step B1001), and then executes the time information storage process (step B1020). The time information storage process sets whether or not to execute a regular effect. Details of the time information storage processing will be described later with reference to FIG. The time information storage process is executed only once when the power is turned on.

  FIG. 153 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of time information storage processing according to the second embodiment of this invention.

  First, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the initialization switch signal is ON (step B7701). Since the initialization switch signal is a signal that is input when forced RAM clear is performed, the initialization switch signal is input when an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine. Since it is impossible to perform RAM clear for each gaming machine at the same time, the gaming machines individually cleared to RAM will be cleared up to the reference time for the regular presentation, so execute a regular presentation synchronized with multiple gaming machines. I can't do it.

  When the initialization switch signal is ON (the result of Step B7701 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 clears the reference date information for executing the regular effect (Step B7710). Further, a regular production invalid flag for invalidating the regular production is stored in the RAM 711 (step B7711). Finally, the regular effect invalid notice information is set (step B7712), and the time information storage process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the initialization switch signal is not on (the result of Step B7701 is “N”), the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the reference date information for executing the regular performance is stored. Determination is made (step B7702). When the reference date information is not stored (the result of Step B7702 is “N”), the date information acquired from the RTC 715 is stored in the RAM 711 as the reference date information (Step B7703). The reference date information is newly stored when the power is turned on for the first time after the RAM is cleared. Further, the regular production invalid flag for invalidating the regular production is cleared (step B7704).

  The main control microcomputer 710 acquires the date / time information from the RTC 715 after the reference date / time information is set or when the reference date / time information is stored (the result of step B7702 is “Y”). (Step B7705). The date information is a date (year / month / day) and time.

  Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 determines a regular effect mode based on the reference date information and the date / time information acquired in the process of step B7705, and stores it in the RAM 711 (step B7706). The regular performance mode is determined based on the number of days elapsed from the reference date. An example of a table for determining the regular effect mode will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 154 is a diagram illustrating an example of a regular effect mode determination table for determining the mode of the regular effect according to the second embodiment of this invention. The regular performance of this embodiment is determined based on the number of days that have elapsed since the reference date. As the reference date, the time when the power is first turned on after the RAM is cleared is set.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 154, the mode of the regular production is switched from production A to production F every two weeks, and after 12 weeks, production A to production F is sequentially executed for each regular production. It has become. After 12 weeks, the player may be able to select the effect F from the effect A, or the player may be able to determine (customize) the effect for each regular effect.

  Here, the description returns to the flowchart of the time information storage process of FIG. The main control microcomputer 710 determines the execution time of the regular effect based on the date / time information acquired in step B7705, and stores it in the execution information storage area of the RAM 711 (step B7707). An example of the execution information storage area for storing the execution time of the regular effects will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 155 is a diagram illustrating an example of the content of the execution information storage area for the regular effects according to the second embodiment of this invention. In the execution information storage area of the regular production, the number of regular productions indicating the execution times of the regular production, the execution time corresponding to the number of regular productions, and the production mode to be executed are stored. In FIG. 155, the information is stored with the power-on time being 09: 00: 1.28.

  In the present embodiment, the number of regular effects is six times a day, but the number may be reduced depending on the power-on time. The execution time is updated every time the power is turned on, and in this embodiment, the execution time is defined to be executed every two hours with reference to the time when the power is turned on. The execution time is determined and stored in the process of step B7706.

  Furthermore, the effect mode is determined by the process of step B7706 based on the date information. It should be noted that the production mode of each regular production is not uniquely determined by the number of days elapsed from the reference date, but the production mode executed at each regular production by operating the production button 17 when waiting for a customer, etc. May be arbitrarily set (customized) by the player. In addition, when making a player arbitrarily set (customize), you may make it select from the aspect of execution performed in the past, and a player's personal game history (game frequency, mission achievement level, etc.) ) May be selected according to the production mode.

  Here, the description returns to the flowchart of the time information storage process of FIG. Finally, the main control microcomputer 710 sets the regular effect valid notification information (step B7708) and ends the time information storage process. Note that the regular effect valid notification information set in the process of step B7708 and the regular effect invalid notification information set in the process of step B7712 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 156 is a diagram illustrating an example of the regular effect notification information according to the second embodiment of the present invention, in which (A) is the regular effect invalid notification information and (B) is the regular effect valid notification information.

  The regular production invalidity notification information is displayed when the RAM clear is executed (initialization switch signal is input), and specifically, is displayed after the time information storage process is executed or when a power-on command is received. .

  The regular effect valid notification information is displayed when the power is restored without executing the RAM clear (normal restoration at the time of power failure), or when all the models are turned on at the same time. Displayed after executing the information storage process or when receiving a power failure recovery command.

  Next, the procedure for actually executing the regular effects will be described. The regular effect is executed at a preset time as described above. FIG. 157 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the first scene control process according to the second embodiment of this invention. In the 1st scene control process of the second embodiment, a regular effect execution process (step B1323) for executing a regular effect is added to the processes included in the 1st scene control process of the first embodiment. .

  The regular effect execution process is executed at the end of the 1st scene control process, and compares the current time with the execution start time of the regular effect to execute the regular effect or to control the regular effect being executed. Details of the regular effect execution process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 158 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a regular effect execution process according to the second embodiment of this invention.

  First, the main control microcomputer 710 acquires time information from the RTC 715 (step B7801). And based on the acquired time information, it is determined whether it is a regular production start time (step B7802). If it is not the regular production start time (the result of step B7802 is “N”), the processing after step B7806 is executed. In the process of step B7801, it is determined from the time information acquired from the RTC 715 that it is the start time of the regular effect, but the effect control device 700 sets the time based on the time information acquired when the power is turned on. The time may be measured, and the start time of the regular production may be determined based on the time.

  When the regular production start time comes (the result of step B7802 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 acquires the production modes (A to F) from the execution information storage area of the regular production (step B7803). . Furthermore, the regular production execution time corresponding to the production mode is set in the regular production timer (step B7804). The regular production execution time may be included in the regular production mode determination table, or a dedicated correspondence table may be stored.

  Furthermore, the main control microcomputer 710 starts execution of the regular effect in the first sub display device 480 (step B7805). In the regular effect, a video (image) is displayed on the first sub display device 480, and sound is output from the speaker 10. As described above, the regular effect is performed on the first sub display device 480 in preference to the notice effect, so that the execution of the variable display game on the main display device 35 is not hindered. However, when the first sub display device 480 is used for the effect in the variable display game, the execution of the notice effect is restricted. It should be noted that the regular effect may be executed by both the first sub display device 480 and the second sub display device 595.

  Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the regular production is being performed (step B7806). If the regular production is in progress (the result of step B7806 is “Y”), the regular production timer is updated by −1 (step B7814). Then, it is determined whether or not the regular effect timer has reached 0 (step B7815). If the regular effect timer reaches 0 (the result of step B7815 is “Y”), the regular effect execution process is terminated.

  If the periodic effect timer is not 0 (the result of step B7815 is “N”), the main control microcomputer 710 acquires an effect (display and sound) corresponding to the periodic effect timer (step B7816). And the acquired effect is performed (step B7817), and a regular effect execution process is complete | finished.

  On the other hand, the main control microcomputer 710 checks the execution of the notice effect in the second sub display device 595 (step B7808) and executes the notice effect when the regular effect is not being performed (the result of step B7806 is “N”). It is determined whether it is in the middle (step B7808). When the notice effect is being executed (the result of step B7808 is “Y”), the processing after step B7811 is executed.

  If the notice effect is not being executed (the result of Step B7808 is “N”), the main control microcomputer 710 calculates the remaining time until the next regular effect (Step B7809). Then, the calculated remaining time is displayed on the second sub display device 595 (step B7810). Since the display of the remaining time until the next regular effect has a lower priority than the notice effect, the execution of the notice effect on the second sub display device 595 is not hindered. Note that the remaining time may be preferentially displayed prior to the notice effect when a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes) before the regular effect.

  Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 clears the restriction flag for the notice effect including the movement of the first sub display device 480 (upper effect device 400) (step B7811). Then, it is determined whether or not it is 3 minutes before the regular effect (step B7812). If it is 3 minutes before (the result of step B7812 is “Y”), the first sub display device 480 (upper effect device 400). The restriction flag of the notice effect including the movement of is set (step B7813). By controlling in this way, execution of the notice effect such that the first sub display device 480 moves in front of the main display device 35 when the regular effect is near is restricted, and the effect on the main display device 35 is not hindered. Regular production can be started.

  If there is only one sub display device, the regular effect and the display of the remaining time may be performed on the same sub display device. At this time, display may be given priority in the order of regular effect> notice effect> remaining time display. If the reliability is high, the notice effect may be given priority.

  Further, in the customer waiting state, in order to suppress wasteful power consumption, the state in which the state is shifted to the eco (energy saving) display mode may be maintained and the regular presentation may not be executed. On the other hand, when the customer is waiting, a regular effect may be executed on both the main display device and the sub display device.

  The execution procedure of the regular effect has been described above. A specific example of the regular effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 159 to 162.

  FIG. 159 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect aspect before the regular effect according to the second embodiment of this invention is executed. (A) is a normal performance, (B) is a case where the notice effect is executed after the movement restriction of the upper effect device 400, and (C) is a case where the notice effect is executed after the movement restriction.

  In the state shown in (A), as it is displayed on the second sub display device 595, since there is more than 5 minutes until the start of the next regular effect, the normal effect is executed and the movement of the upper effect device 400 is also restricted. It has not been.

  In the state shown in (B), since it is within 3 minutes until the start of the next regular effect, the restriction flag for the notice effect including the movement of the first sub display device 480 is set. In this state, as shown in (C), even if the notice effect is executed, the notice effect is executed without sliding the upper effect device 400 downward. Note that the display contents of the first sub display device 480 and the second sub display device 595 are the same as those in the normal notice display. By controlling in this way, as described above, the regular effect can be executed without hindering the execution of the variable display game on the main display device 35.

  FIG. 160 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect aspect before the regular effect according to the second embodiment of this invention is executed. (A) shows the state after the end of the variable display game, (B) during the execution of the variable display game, and (C) the state before the execution of the regular effects. As shown in (A) to (C), the game is continued in a state where the effect accompanying the movement of the upper effect device 400 is restricted.

  FIG. 161 is a diagram illustrating an example of a mode during execution of a regular effect according to the second embodiment of this invention. (A) shows the state immediately before execution of the regular production, (B) shows the state during execution of the regular production, and (C) shows the state during execution of the regular production.

  Referring to (A), a countdown effect by voice or the like is executed immediately before execution of the regular effect. Then, when the countdown ends, a regular effect is started as shown in (B). At this time, the first sub-display device 480 displays information such as an effect name. In addition, since the movement of the top effect device 400 including the first sub display device 480 is restricted from three minutes ago, the regular effect is usually executed at the normal position (initial position). In addition, when a countdown effect is executed in a pre-reading notice effect over a plurality of variable display games or a pseudo-continuous effect that simulates a plurality of variable display games in one variable display game, a countdown effect of a regular effect and a sound or the like It is good to change.

  Thereafter, as shown in (C), the regular effect is started and executed for a predetermined time. Since the execution time of the regular effect is set longer than the change time of the variable display game, a plurality of variable display games are executed across the execution of the regular effect. Further, during the regular production, the volume of either the audio output by the regular production or the voice output by the variable display game including the notice production may be increased. For example, the announcement production with high reliability (expected degree) The sound output volume in the variable display game may be increased only when is executed. In addition, the volume of sound output by the regular effect may be always increased.

  FIG. 162 is a diagram illustrating an example of a mode at the end of a regular effect according to the second embodiment of this invention. (A) shows the state during execution of the regular effect, (B) shows the state immediately before the end of the regular effect, and (C) shows the state after the end of the regular effect.

  As shown in (A), even if the regular effect is being executed, if the notice effect is not being executed, a normal effect image is displayed on the second sub display device 595. In addition, during execution of the regular effect, if the variable display game on the main display device 35 is not obstructed, an effect that causes one or both of the upper effect device 400 and the right effect device 500 to swing up and down is generated. As part of

  As shown in (B), at the end of the regular performance, the end is notified by display of the first sub display device 480, voice output, or the like. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. In addition, in the variable display game that is being executed at the timing of returning from the regular production, there is a possibility that the production cannot be normally executed when returning to the normal production. If the effect can be normally executed by comparing the fluctuation time and the remaining time of the regular effect, the notice effect may be executed without restriction.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the example in which the regular effect is executed by the first sub display device 480 has been described, but the regular effect may be executed by the main display device 35. FIG. 163 is a diagram illustrating a modified example in which a regular effect is executed on the main display device 35 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. (A) is immediately before the start of the regular production, (B) is at the start of the regular production, and (C) is during execution of the regular production.

  As shown in (A), the regular effect is started together with the countdown effect, as in the second embodiment. At this time, the movement of the top effect device 400 is restricted. Then, as shown in (B) and (C), when the regular effect is started, the regular effect is executed on the main display device 35 and the first sub display device 480. At this time, the variable display game is reduced and executed in a partial area of the main display device 35. Further, in the second sub display device 595, an auxiliary effect such as a notice effect is continuously executed. Note that the variable display game may be executed on the first sub display device 480 or the second sub display device 595.

  Finally, as described with reference to FIG. 150, a modified example in which the regular effect is executed when the wide second sub display device 595 is provided will be described. FIG. 164 is a diagram showing a modification in which the second sub display device 595 according to the second embodiment of the present invention is disposed across the opening (display window) 34a and the game board 32 at the initial position. is there.

  In this modified example, in the second sub-display device 595, the region that is difficult to see by seeing through the game board 32 (the perspective display region) is not so important after the start of the game, as in the example shown in FIG. Model information (model name, specifications such as probability) is displayed. On the other hand, in the area facing the display window 34a (non-perspective display area), the remaining time until the notice effect or the regular effect regarded as important after the game starts is displayed.

  The remaining time may be displayed instead of the model information in the fluoroscopic display area, or the model information and the remaining time may be displayed.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by executing the regular effect based on the time information (time value) without hindering the display of the variable display game. In addition, since the specific effect is executed with priority over the auxiliary effect in the effect display area for the auxiliary effect (first sub display device 480), it is possible to effectively execute the regular effect with a high effect.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the regular effect from being started in a state where the first sub display device 480 is located closer to the center of the main display device 35. It is possible to achieve both a regular production display. Further, since the notice effect is prioritized over the display of the remaining time until the next regular effect, the remaining time until the next specific effect can be notified without obstructing the notice effect.

  By the way, in a conventional gaming machine, a board-side connector is mounted on a display board having a variable display unit composed of a plurality of light emitting members (LEDs, etc.), and one end is a control device that controls a variable display game The display board and the control device are connected by inserting an end connector provided at the other end of the connected wiring into the board-side connector, and a specific light emitting member of the variable display section blinks during the variable display game. It has been proposed to display that a variable display game is being displayed, and finally derive the result of the variable display game by lighting one or more light-emitting members (for example, JP 2009-045343, JP2011-217828).

  In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, when connecting the board side connector of the display board and the end connector of the wiring, the connectors are not sufficiently inserted or provided on the board side connector. If the pins are deformed or broken, connection failure may occur (particularly, connection failure is more likely to occur at the end of the row of the pin array).

  If such a connection failure occurs, the light emission state of a plurality of light emitting members (LEDs, etc.) constituting the variable display unit will be hindered. If a connection failure occurs on a pin corresponding to one or a plurality of light-emitting members for displaying the display, it is difficult to grasp from the display state of the variable display section whether or not the result of the variable display game has been derived. This causes the inconvenience of becoming.

  Whether or not the result of the variable display game is derived if a connection failure occurs in the pin corresponding to one or a plurality of light emitting members for displaying the deviation of the application frequency as a result of the variable display game Inconvenience that it becomes difficult to grasp from the display state of the variable display section.

  On the other hand, according to the invention described in the embodiment of the present application, a connection failure occurs in a pin corresponding to one or a plurality of light-emitting members for displaying a frequently missed application as a result of the variable display game. This can be avoided as much as possible, and the inconvenience that it is difficult to grasp that the result of the variable display game is derived from the display state of the variable display unit can be solved.

  In addition, it is avoided as much as possible that a connection failure occurs in a pin corresponding to a specific light emitting member for displaying that the variable display is being performed, and the player can check the progress of the variable display game from the display state of the variable display unit. It becomes possible to solve the problem that it becomes difficult to grasp.

  Further, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, since the plurality of light emitting members constituting the variable display unit are not always lit, the variable light display member must be actually played unless the variable display game is played. There was a problem that it was not possible to confirm whether or not each of them appropriately emitted light.

  In addition, if it is not possible to check the lighting of all the light-emitting members that make up the variable display part simply by executing the variable display game (if there is a light-emitting part that does not emit light unless it is a hit), check the lighting. There is also a problem that it takes a very long time.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the present embodiment, it is possible to efficiently check whether or not any defects relating to the plurality of light emitting members constituting the variable display unit have occurred.

  Further, in some conventional gaming machines, the display device is composed of a main display device and a sub display device disposed on one side of the main display device, and the sub display device overlaps the front of the main display device. As described above, there has been proposed a technique in which the player can visually recognize the front and back of the sub display device by rotating the support shaft as a center (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-087706).

  However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, since the two display devices are arranged so as to fit inside the window portion formed in the game board, the window portion must be made larger than necessary. There is a problem that the space for placing the game ball and other game members are compressed.

  In addition, when two display devices are accommodated inside a limited-size window portion so that the two display devices are not overlapped as much as possible, there is a great restriction on the size and arrangement of at least one of the two display devices. There was a problem that.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the present embodiment, it is possible to relax the restrictions on the game board layout generated by providing two display devices, and improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, in a conventional gaming machine, there is provided a time measuring means such as an RTC (real time clock), and a specific effect is executed by the effect device every time the time measured by the time measuring means becomes an effect execution value. Have been proposed (for example, JP 2008-104741 A and JP 2010-017352 A).

  However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, when the time measured by the time measuring means becomes the effect execution value, a specific effect (time effect) is executed on the display device. Display may be hindered, and there is a problem that the interest of the game is attenuated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the present embodiment, it is possible to enhance the interest by executing the specific effect based on the time measurement value without inhibiting the display of the variable display game.

In addition, in a conventional gaming machine, every time the set time elapses, the effect (variation) mode is alternately switched between “1” and “2”, and the effect (variation) set when the variable display game is executed. A gaming machine in which a variation pattern is determined from a variation pattern table corresponding to a mode has also been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-038790).
However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, the effect mode is automatically switched every time the set time elapses even though a function for switching the effect mode is provided. There was a problem that the player could not be involved in the determination of the game, and the interest of the game was reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by involving the player in determining the production mode.

  Moreover, the following is mentioned as a typical thing of the viewpoint of this invention other than what was described in the claim.

  (1) In a gaming machine having a gaming board in which a gaming area on which a game ball can flow down is formed on a surface, a first display device for performing display according to the progress of the game, and display of the first display device And a second display device for performing display related to the contents, and the game board is provided with a display window portion that allows the rear to be visible so as to face the game area, and at least one of the game areas. The first display device is arranged so that the display unit faces behind the display window, and the second display device is located behind the game area. A gaming machine characterized by being arranged so that a display portion faces.

  (2) The first display device is disposed at a position spaced rearward from the back surface of the game board, and the second display device is located closer to the back surface of the game board than the first display device. The gaming machine according to (1), which is arranged.

  (3) It includes a movement control means capable of moving the second display device by controlling a movement mechanism that enables the second display device to move in front of the first display device, and the movement control means includes: The second display device is moved to an inner position facing the rear of the display window portion based on establishment of a predetermined movement condition, while the second display device is moved to the game area based on establishment of a predetermined return condition. The game machine according to (1) or (2), wherein the game machine is moved to an outer position facing the rear of the game machine.

  (4) Swing control capable of swinging the second display device by controlling a swing mechanism that allows the second display device to swing in a direction crossing the moving direction of the movement control means. The swing control means swings the second display device when the second display device is not moved by the movement control means, while the second display device is swung by the movement control means. The gaming machine according to (3), wherein the second display device is not rocked when the is moving.

  (5) Provided with display control means capable of controlling the display of the first display device and the second display device according to the progress of the game, and the second display device is disposed at the outer position. In such a case, the display unit straddles the rear of the display window unit and the rear of the game area, and the display control means is configured so that when the second display device is disposed at the outer position, (3) or (3), wherein different display is performed in a non-perspective display area located behind the display window part and a fluoroscopic display area located behind the game area in the display part of the second display device. A gaming machine according to 4).

  (6) A special game advantageous to the player when a variable display game based on a plurality of pieces of identification information is executed based on winning of a game ball at a start opening provided in the game area, and the variable display game results in a special result. When the second display device is arranged at the outer position, the display control means displays the effect of the variable display game in the non-perspective display area when the second display device is arranged at the outer position. The gaming machine according to (5), wherein a non-effect display that does not produce the variable display game is performed in the fluoroscopic display area.

  (7) The gaming machine according to (6), wherein the display control means displays model information of the gaming machine as the non-production display.

  The embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is defined not by the above description of the invention but by the scope of the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the scope of the claims.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above embodiment, but can also be applied to gaming machines that use gaming balls such as arrange ball gaming machines and sparrow ball gaming machines.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Game machine 2 Main body frame 4 Opening / closing frame 5 Front frame 5a Storage part 5d Projection press part 6 Glass frame 6b Reinforcement metal plate 6c Conduction part 12 Game state notification LED
17 effect button 23 magnetic sensor 24 radio wave sensor 30 game board 31 game area 32 game board 32a guide rail 32b partition member 32f notch part 34 center case 34f distribution space 34g first passage gate part (lottery gate, first specific area)
34h Second passage gate (fixed gate, second specific area)
35 Fluctuating display device (main display device, first display device)
36 Normal start gate 37 First start prize opening (first start prize area)
38 2nd start prize opening (2nd start prize area)
40 general winning opening 41 first special variable winning device 42 second special variable winning device 50 collective display device (display substrate)
51 First special figure change display (Special figure 1 indicator)
52 Second Special Figure Change Display (Special Figure 2 Display)
53 General Map Display (General Map Display)
54 Special figure 1 hold display part 55 Special figure 2 hold display part 56 Universal figure hold display part 61-63 Lens member 65 Board | substrate side connector 66 Connection wiring 66a Wiring side connector 99e Notification LED
220 Lower rendering device 222 Cover member 223 Movable decorative member 240 Upper decorative unit 241b, 274 Magnetic sensor housing portion 243b, 275 Dummy housing portion 276 Radio wave sensor housing portion 300 Back side production device 330 Shutter unit 340 Rotating door 344 Magnetic body 400 Upper portion Production device 470 Light guide plate 480 Display (sub display device, first sub display device, second display device)
500 Right portion rendering device 580 Rotating cylinder 590 Infrared sensor (human sensor)
595 Second sub display device (second display device)
600 Game control device 607a First passage detection sensor 607b Second passage detection sensor 610 CPU portion 620 input portion 630 output portion 640 payout control device 693 collective display connector (display connector)
700 Production Control Unit 710 Main Control Microcomputer (1stCPU)
715 RTC (Real Time Clock)
716 battery 720 video control microcomputer (2nd CPU)
800 Power supply unit 820 Backup power supply unit 900 Static elimination unit 901 Conductive member 901a Fixed portion 901b Press receiving portion 901c Flat plate portion 901d Contact portion 905 Accommodation space forming portion 905a Accommodation space 906 Rail conduction portion 906a Insertion portion 907 Base member 908 Conduction member 991 Magnetic sensor detection range 992 Human sensor detection range

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area where gaming balls can flow down is formed,
A first display device having a display unit capable of displaying an image according to the progress of the game;
A second display device having a display unit capable of displaying an image related to the display content of the first display device,
The gaming board is provided with a display window portion that allows the rear to be visible so as to face the gaming area, and at least a part of the gaming area can be seen through the rear,
The first display device is arranged so that a display unit faces behind the display window unit,
The second display device is arranged such that a display unit faces the rear of the game area,
Moving means for moving the second display device forward of the first display device; and swinging means for swinging the second display device;
A gaming machine characterized in that a swinging effect by swinging the second display device is performed by the swinging means.

Images